Samsung Mfp 29ppm Printer Slm2875fdxaa User Manual

User’s Guide  
SCX-472x Series  
SCX-470x Series  
BASIC  
BASIC  
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and  
troubleshooting on windows.  
ADVANCED  
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration, operation and  
troubleshooting on various OS environments.  
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.  
 
BASIC  
113  
126  
3
Key benefits  
Environmentally friendly  
Convenience  
To save toner and paper, this machine supports Eco feature.  
Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you  
captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard (see "Easy Capture  
To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper  
Printing Status (or Smart Panel) is a program that monitors and informs you  
of the machine’s status and allows you to customize the machine’s settings  
To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (double-sided  
To save electricity, this machine automatically conserves electricity by  
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.  
AnyWeb Print helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print the  
screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you use the  
Fast high resolution printing  
Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the  
latest version during the printer driver installation process. This is available  
only for Windows.  
You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi effective output.  
Fast, on-demand printing.  
SCX-472x Series, SCX-470x Series:  
-
-
For single-side printing, 28 ppm (A4) or 29 ppm (Letter).  
For duplex printing, 14 ppm (A4) or 15 ppm (Letter).  
   
Key benefits  
Wide range of functionality and application support  
Supports various paper sizes (see "Print media specifications" on page 105).  
Print watermark: You can customize your documents with words, such as  
Print posters: The text and pictures of each page of your document are  
magnified and printed across the multiple sheets of paper and can then be  
taped together to form a poster (see "Using advanced print features" on  
You can print in various operating systems (see "System requirements" on  
Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and/or a network interface.  
Features by models  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country.  
Operating System  
SCX-472xFD Series  
SCX-472xHD Series  
SCX-472xHN Series  
SCX-472xFW Series  
SCX-472xHW Series  
Operating System  
SCX-470x ND Series  
Windows  
Macintosh  
Linux  
Unix  
(: Included, Blank: Not available)  
Software  
SCX-472xFD Series  
SCX-472xHD Series  
SCX-472xHN Series  
SCX-472xFW Series  
SCX-472xHW Series  
Software  
SCX-470x ND Series  
a
PCL / SPL printer driver  
PS printer driver  
XPS printer driver  
Direct Printing Utility  
       
Features by models  
SCX-472xFD Series  
SCX-472xHD Series  
SCX-472xHN Series  
SCX-472xFW Series  
SCX-472xHW Series  
Software  
SCX-470x ND Series  
Samsung Easy  
Printer Manager  
Scan to PC settings  
Fax to PC settings  
Device settings  
Samsung Printer Status  
Smart Panel  
AnyWeb Print  
SyncThru™ Web Service  
SyncThru Admin Web Service  
Easy Eco Driver  
Fax  
Samsung Network PC  
Fax  
Scan  
Twain scan driver  
WIA scan driver  
Samsung Scan Assistant  
SmarThru 4  
SmarThru Office  
a. Depending on the operating system you use, the installed print driver may differ.  
Features by models  
(: Included, Blank: Not available)  
Features by models  
Variety feature  
SCX-472xFD Series  
SCX-472xHD Series  
SCX-472xHN Series  
SCX-472xFW Series  
SCX-472xHW Series  
Features  
SCX-470xND Series  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0  
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX  
wired LAN  
Network Interface 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN  
Eco printing  
Duplex (2-sided) printing  
USB memory interface  
Touch screen  
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)  
Handset  
(SCX-472xHD Series, SCX-472xHN  
Series only)  
(SCX-472xHW Series only)  
 
Features by models  
SCX-472xFD Series  
SCX-472xHD Series  
SCX-472xHN Series  
SCX-472xFW Series  
SCX-472xHW Series  
Features  
SCX-470xND Series  
Fax  
Multi-send  
Delay send  
Priority send  
Duplex send  
Secure receive  
Duplex print  
Send/ Receive  
forward - fax  
Send/ Receive  
forward - email  
Send/ Receive  
forward - server  
Scan  
Scanning to email  
Scanning to SMB  
server  
Scanning to FTP  
server  
Duplex scan  
Scan to PC  
11  
1. Introduction  
Features by models  
SCX-472xFD Series  
SCX-472xHD Series  
SCX-472xHN Series  
SCX-472xFW Series  
SCX-472xHW Series  
Features  
SCX-470xND Series  
Copy  
ID card copying  
Collation  
Poster  
Clone  
Book  
Copy (Continue)  
2-up/ 4-up  
Adjust background  
Margin shift  
Edge erase  
Gray enhance  
Duplex copy  
(: Included, Blank: Not available)  
12  
1. Introduction  
Useful to know  
A paper jam has occurred.  
The machine does not print.  
Open and close the front door.  
Open the print queue list and remove the document from the  
Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this  
manual and troubleshoot accordingly (see "Clearing paper  
Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows.  
Printouts are blurry.  
Where can I purchase accessories or supplies?  
The toner level might be low or uneven. Shake the toner  
cartridge.  
Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer.  
Try a different print resolution setting.  
Replace the toner cartridge.  
Visit www.samsung.com/supplies. Select your country/region  
to view product service information.  
Where can I download the machine’s driver?  
The status LED flashes or remains constantly on.  
Turn the product off and on again.  
Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and  
   
About this user’s guide  
2
This user's guide provides information for your basic understanding of the  
machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage.  
General icons  
Read the safety information before using the machine.  
If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting  
chapter.  
Icon  
Text  
Description  
Gives users information to protect the machine from  
possible mechanical damage or malfunction.  
Caution  
Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter.  
All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending  
on its options or model you purchased.  
Provides additional information or detailed  
specification of the machine function and feature.  
Note  
The screenshots in this administrator’s guide may differ from your machine  
depending on the machine’s firmware/driver version.  
The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows 7.  
1
Conventions  
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:  
Document is synonymous with original.  
Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.  
Machine refers to printer or MFP.  
14  
1. Introduction  
       
Safety information  
4
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and  
others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read  
and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. After reading  
this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.  
Operating environment  
Warning  
3
Important safety symbols  
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is  
not grounded.  
Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or  
heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.).  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe  
personal injury or death.  
Warning  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes  
strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off  
the power switch and unplug the machine.  
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor  
Caution  
personal injury or property damage.  
The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of  
emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out.  
Do not attempt.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord.  
Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy  
object could result in electric shock or fire.  
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the  
plug with wet hands.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
15  
1. Introduction  
     
Safety information  
5
Caution  
Operating method  
Caution  
During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation,  
remove the power plug from the electrical outlet.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.  
Burns could occur.  
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.  
It can cause damage to the machine.  
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears  
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and  
request assistance from qualified service personnel.  
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper  
tray.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
You may get injured.  
If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions  
have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface  
connections and request assistance from qualified service  
personnel.  
This machine's power reception device is the power cord.  
To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the  
electrical outlet.  
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.  
New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not  
attempt to force it in.  
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper  
output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch.  
Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could  
result in electric shock.  
Burns can occur.  
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC  
interface cords.  
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal  
objects.  
This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet.  
It can damage the machine.  
16  
1. Introduction  
Safety information  
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray.  
It can damage the machine.  
Caution  
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.  
Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all  
This could result in elevated component temperatures which can  
cause damage or fire.  
cords.  
Then lift the machine:  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other  
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation  
exposure.  
If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09 lbs), lift with 1 person.  
If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09 lbs) - 40kg (88.18 lbs), lift  
with 2 people.  
If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18 lbs), lift with 4 or  
more people.  
6
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.  
Installation / Moving  
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.  
The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.  
Warning  
a
Use only No.26 AWG or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary.  
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.  
Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity, or water  
leaks.  
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical  
outlet.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe  
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6  
feet) with a 110V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or  
larger.  
Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result  
in electric shock or fire.  
17  
1. Introduction  
Safety information  
The machine should be connected to  
When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or  
cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine.  
the power level which is specified on the label.  
You could get injured.  
If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using,  
contact the electrical utility company.  
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.  
Children could get hurt.  
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight  
location, such as a closet.  
If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.  
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.  
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself.  
It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the  
machine needs repairing.  
This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock  
or fire.  
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean  
from dust or water.  
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge  
Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.  
7
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide  
provided with the machine.  
Maintenance / Checking  
Caution  
Otherwise, you could damage the machine.  
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with  
screws.  
Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service  
technician. Repair by non-certified technicians could result in  
fire or electric shock.  
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the  
inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene,  
paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the  
machine.  
The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service  
technician.  
This could result in electric shock or fire.  
18  
1. Introduction  
Safety information  
8
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the  
machine.  
Supply usage  
In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service  
fee will be charged.  
Caution  
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.  
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.  
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser  
unit.  
This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire.  
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away  
from children.  
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.  
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,  
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.  
Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.  
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash  
it.  
Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.  
19  
1. Introduction  
Machine overview  
9
Accessories  
Power cord  
Quick installation guide  
a
b
Software CD  
Handset  
c
Misc. accessories  
a. The software CD contains the print drivers and software applications.  
b. Handset model only (see "Features by models" on page 7)  
c. Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model.  
20  
1. Introduction  
   
Machine overview  
10  
Front view  
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
1
2
7
8
13  
14 Document feeder input tray  
Document feeder cover  
Scanner glass  
Manual feeder tray  
Front cover  
Document feeder guide cover  
21  
1. Introduction  
 
Machine overview  
3
4
5
Document feeder output tray  
Control Panel  
9
Output tray  
10 Output support  
11  
15 Paper width guide on a document feeder  
16 Document feeder output support  
a
17  
Paper level indicator  
Tray  
Paper width guide on a manual feeder  
Handset  
6
12 Scanner lid  
a. Handset model only (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
22  
1. Introduction  
Machine overview  
11  
Rear view  
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model.  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
1
2
3
4
Telephone line socket (Line)  
(SCX-472x Series only)  
5
6
Network port  
Power receptacle  
Rear cover  
Extension telephone socket (EXT)  
(SCX-472x Series only)  
USB port  
23  
1. Introduction  
   
Control panel overview  
1
Eco  
Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption  
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model.  
There are various types of control panels.  
2
Configures the wireless network connection easily  
without a computer (see Advanced Guide).  
(WPS)  
12  
Darkness  
Adjust the brightness level to make a copy for  
easier reading, when the original contains faint  
markings and dark images.  
A Type (SCX-472x Series)  
3
4
ID Copy  
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a  
driver’s license on a single side of paper (see "ID  
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine  
from the power save mode. If you need to turn the  
machine off, press this button for more than three  
seconds.  
(Power)  
5
6
7
Switches to Fax mode.  
Switches to Copy mode.  
Switches to Scan mode.  
(Fax)  
(Copy)  
(Scan)  
8
9
Opens Menu mode and scrolls through the  
available menus.  
(Menu)  
Left/Right Arrows  
Scrolls through the options available in the  
selected menu and increases or decreases values.  
24  
1. Introduction  
       
Control panel overview  
13  
10 OK  
Confirms the selection on the screen.  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
B Type (SCX-470x Series)  
11  
(Back)  
12  
13  
Starts a job.  
(Start)  
Stops an operations at any time.  
(Stop/Clear)  
14 Status LED  
Indicates the status of your machine (see  
15 Numeric keypad  
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters.  
16  
When you press this button, you can hear a dial  
tone. Then enter a fax number. It is similar to  
making a call using speaker phone.  
(On Hook Dial)  
17  
Redials the last number in ready mode, or inserts a  
pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode.  
Redial/Pause(-)  
18  
Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or  
search for stored fax numbers.  
(Address Book)  
19 Display screen  
Shows the current status and displays prompts  
during an operation.  
1
Eco  
Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption  
25  
1. Introduction  
       
Control panel overview  
2
Darkness  
Adjust the brightness level to make a copy for  
easier reading, when the original contains faint  
markings and dark images.  
13 Status LED  
Indicates the status of your machine (see  
14  
3
ID Copy  
Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a  
driver’s license on a single side of paper (see "ID  
Adjusting the control panel  
4
5
Scan to  
(Power)  
Turns the power on or off, or wakes up the machine  
from the power save mode. If you need to turn the  
machine off, press this button for more than three  
seconds.  
6
7
8
Display screen  
Shows the current status and displays prompts  
during an operation.  
Opens Menu mode and scrolls through the  
available menus.  
(Menu)  
Left/Right Arrows  
Scrolls through the options available in the  
selected menu and increases or decreases values.  
9
OK  
Confirms the selection on the screen.  
Sends you back to the upper menu level.  
10  
(Back)  
11  
12  
Starts a job.  
(Start)  
Stops an operations at any time.  
(Stop/Clear)  
26  
1. Introduction  
     
Turning on the machine  
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first.  
1
Turn the switch on if the machine has a power switch.  
27  
1. Introduction  
   
Installing the driver locally  
A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer  
using the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following  
steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine’s driver (see  
Advanced Guide).  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
3
Click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.  
X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD-  
ROM drive and click OK.  
Select Install Now.  
If you are a Macintosh, Linux, or Unix OS user, refer to the Advanced  
guide.  
The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending on the  
machine and interface in use.  
Selecting Custom Installation allows you to choose which programs to  
install.  
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters (118 inches).  
15  
Windows  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
(SCX-470x Series does not support the Wireless Setting and  
Installation menu)  
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the installation  
procedure, click Cancel to close the window.  
Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the  
License Agreement. Then, click Next.  
4
5
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
28  
1. Introduction  
   
Reinstalling the driver  
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to reinstall the driver.  
16  
Windows  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.  
1
From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Uninstall.  
2
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
3
Insert the software CD into your CD-ROM drive and install the driver again (see "Installing the driver locally" on page 28).  
4
29  
1. Introduction  
   
2. Menu overview and basic  
setup  
This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options.  
 
Menu overview  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use  
the machine’s functions.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
Press (Stop/Clear) to return to the ready mode.  
6
7
An asterisk (*) appears next to the currently selected menu.  
SCX-472x Series  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its  
options or the models.  
Items  
Options  
SCX-470x Series does not support the fax features.  
a
Darkness  
Light+5- Light+1  
Normal  
Fax Feature  
Dark+1- Dark+5  
1
Contrast  
Light+5- Light+1  
Normal  
Accessing the menu  
Dark+1- Dark+5  
Select the Fax, Copy, or Scan button on the control panel depending on  
the feature to be used.  
1
Resolution  
Standard  
Fine  
Select  
(Menu) until the menu you want appears on the bottom line  
2
3
4
of the display and press OK.  
Super Fine  
Photo Fax  
Color Fax  
Press the left/right arrows until the needed menu item appears and press  
OK.  
Scan Size  
If the setting item has sub menus, repeat step 3.  
Multi Send  
Delay Send  
Press the left/right arrows to access the required value.  
5
31  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
       
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Priority Send  
Forward  
Receiving  
Receive Mode  
Ring To Answer  
Stamp RCV Name  
RCV Start Code  
Auto Reduction  
Discard Size  
Fax Feature  
Fax Setup  
Fax  
PC  
Secure Receive  
On  
Off  
Print  
Junk Fax Setup  
DRPD Mode  
Add Page  
Cancel Job  
Sending  
Duplex Print  
Redial Times  
Redial Term  
Prefix Dial  
Fax Setup  
Change Default  
Auto Report  
Resolution  
Darkness  
Contrast  
ECM Mode  
Send Report  
Image TCR  
Scan Size  
On  
Off  
b
Dial Mode  
Copy Feature Scan Size  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Darkness  
Light+5- Light+1  
Normal  
Dark+1- Dark+5  
32  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Scan Size  
Copy Feature Contrast  
Light+5- Light+1  
Normal  
Copy Setup  
Change Default  
Copies  
Dark+1- Dark+5  
Copy Collation  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Duplex  
Original Type  
Text  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Layout  
Normal  
2-Up  
Original Type  
Adjust Bkgd.  
4-Up  
Print Setup  
Orientation  
Duplex  
Portrait  
ID copy  
Poster Copy  
Clone Copy  
Landscape  
Off  
1 -> 2 Side Long  
1 -> 2 SideShort  
Adjust Bkgd.  
Off  
Auto  
Enhance Lev.1  
Enhance Lev.2  
Erase Lev.1- Erase Lev.4  
Copies  
[1-999]:1  
Resolution  
600dpi-Normal  
1200dpi-Best  
Duplex  
Off  
Darkness  
Normal  
Light  
1 -> 2 Side Long  
1 -> 2 SideShort  
Dark  
33  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Machine ID  
Print Setup  
Clear Text  
Off  
System Setup Machine Setup  
Minimum  
Medium  
Maximum  
Fax Number  
Date & Time  
Clock Mode  
Language  
Auto CR  
LF  
Power Save  
LF+CR  
Wakeup Event  
System Timeout  
Job Timeout  
Emulation  
Emulation Type  
Setup  
Altitude Adj.  
c
Auto Continue  
Paper Mismatch  
Paper Substit  
PrintBlankPage  
Toner Save  
Eco Settings  
Paper Setup  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Paper Source  
Margin  
34  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
 
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
All Settings  
System Setup Sound/Volume  
Key Sound  
Alarm Sound  
Speaker  
System Setup Clear Setting  
Print Setup  
Fax Setup  
Ringer  
Copy Setup  
System Setup  
Network Setup  
Address Book  
Report  
All Report  
Configuration  
Supplies Info.  
Address Book  
Fax Sent  
Fax Send  
Fax Received  
Fax Sent  
Network  
TCP/IP (IPv4)  
DHCP  
BOOTP  
Static  
Fax Received  
Schedule Jobs  
Junk Fax  
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
IPv6 Activate  
Network Conf.  
Usage Counter  
DHCPv6 Config  
Ethernet Speed  
Automatic  
Fax Options  
10Mbps Half  
10Mbps Full  
100Mbps Half  
100Mbps Full  
d
Maintenance  
CLR Empty Msg  
Supplies Life  
Serial NO.  
TonerLow Alert  
35  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Menu overview  
Items  
Network  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Clear Setting  
Copy Feature Contrast  
Light+5- Light+1  
Normal  
Network Conf.  
Dark+1- Dark+5  
Wi-Fi ON/OFF  
WPS Setting  
WLAN Setting  
WLAN Default  
WLAN Signal  
Wireless  
Original Type  
Text  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Layout  
Normal  
2-Up  
a. SCX-472x Series Only.  
b. This setting may not be available depending on your country.  
c. This option only appears if “paper mismatch” is enabled.  
4-Up  
d. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.  
ID copy  
Poster Copy  
Clone Copy  
SCX-470x Series  
Adjust Bkgd.  
Off  
Auto  
Items  
Options  
Enhance Lev.1  
Enhance Lev.2  
Erase Lev.1- Erase Lev.4  
Copy Feature Scan Size  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Darkness  
Light+5- Light+1  
Normal  
Duplex  
Off  
1 -> 2 Side Long  
1 -> 2 SideShort  
Dark+1- Dark+5  
36  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
Copy Setup  
Change Default  
Scan Size  
Print Setup  
Clear Text  
Off  
Copies  
Minimum  
Medium  
Copy Collation  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Duplex  
Maximum  
Auto CR  
LF  
Darkness  
LF+CR  
Contrast  
Emulation  
Emulation Type  
Setup  
Original Type  
Adjust Bkgd  
Print Setup  
Orientation  
Duplex  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Off  
1 -> 2 Side Long  
1 -> 2 SideShort  
Copies  
[1-999]:1  
Resolution  
600dpi-Normal  
1200dpi-Best  
Darkness  
Normal  
Light  
Dark  
37  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Menu overview  
Items  
Options  
Items  
Options  
All Report  
System Setup Machine Setup  
Machine ID  
System Setup Report  
Date & Time  
Clock Mode  
Language  
Configuration  
Supplies Info.  
Scheduled Jobs  
Network Conf.  
Usage Counter  
Power Save  
Wakeup Event  
System Timeout  
Job Timeout  
Altitude Adj.  
b
Maintenance  
CLR Empty Msg  
Supplies Life  
Serial Number  
Toner Low Alert  
a
Auto Continue  
Paper Mismatch  
System Setup Clear Setting  
All Settings  
Print Setup  
Paper Substit  
Print Blank Page  
Toner Save  
Copy Setup  
System Setup  
Network Setup  
Eco Settings  
Paper Setup  
Paper Size  
Paper Type  
Paper Source  
Margin  
38  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Menu overview  
Items  
Network  
Options  
TCP/IP (IPv4)  
DHCP  
BOOTP  
Static  
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
IPv6 Activate  
DHCPv6 Config  
Ethernet Speed  
Automatic  
10Mbps Half  
10Mbps Full  
100Mbps Half  
100Mbps Full  
Network  
Clear Setting  
Network Conf.  
a. This option only appears if “paper mismatch” is enabled.  
b. This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.  
39  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Changing the display language  
To change the language that is displayed on the control panel, follow these  
steps:  
Select  
the control panel.  
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Language on  
1
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some  
models.  
Select the language you want to display on the control panel.  
2
3
Press OK to save the selection.  
40  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
   
Media and tray  
This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your  
machine.  
2
1
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause  
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s  
warranty or service agreements.  
1
2
3
Tray extension guide  
Paper length guide  
Paper width guide  
3
Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could  
cause damage to the machine.  
Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.  
If you do not adjust the guide, it may cause paper registration, image skew,  
or jamming of the paper.  
Use designated print media (see "Print media specifications" on page  
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may  
lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire.  
2
Tray overview  
To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.  
41  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
       
Media and tray  
Power  
voltage  
The paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in the tray.  
Available paper  
110V  
220V  
Letter, Legal, US Folio, Oficio  
A4  
2
1
1 Full  
2 Empty  
Paper type available for duplex printing  
Depending on the power voltage your machine uses, available paper types for  
duplex printing differs. Refer to the below table.  
42  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Media and tray  
3
Loading paper in the tray  
When printing using the tray, do not load paper on the manual feeder, it may cause a paper jam.  
43  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
   
Media and tray  
4
Loading in manual feeder  
The manual feeder can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes (see "Print media specifications" on page 105).  
Tips on using the manual feeder  
Load only one type, size and weight of print media at time in the manual feeder.  
To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing when there is still paper in the manual feeder.  
Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the manual feeder first and be placed in the center of the tray.  
To ensure printing quality and to prevent paper jams, only load the available paper (see "Print media specifications" on page 105).  
Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the manual feeder.  
When printing on special media, you must follow the loading guidelines (see "Printing on special media" on page 45).  
When papers overlap when printing using the manual feeder, open tray and remove the papers then try printing again.  
When paper does not feed well while printing, push the paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically.  
When the machine is in a power save mode, the machine does not feed paper from the manual feeder. Wake up the machine by pressing the power button before  
using the manual feeder.  
44  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
   
Media and tray  
5
Printing on special media  
The table below shows the special media usable in each tray.  
The media is also shown in the Printing Preferences. To get the higest printing quality, select the proper media type from the Printing preferences window > Paper  
For example, if you want to print on labels, select Labels for Paper Type.  
45  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
   
Media and tray  
Types  
Thicker  
Tray  
Manual feeder  
When using special media, we recommend you feed one sheet at a time  
Printing the special media (Face up)  
Thin  
If special media are printed out with curl, wrinkles, crease, or black bold  
lines, open the rear cover and try printing again. Keep the rear cover  
opened during printing.  
Bond  
Color  
CardStock  
Labels  
Transparency  
Envelope  
Thick  
Envelope  
Preprinted  
Cotton  
Recycled  
Archive  
(: Included, Blank: Not available)  
Types  
Tray  
Manual feeder  
Envelope  
Plain  
Thick  
Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes.  
46  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
 
Media and tray  
To print an envelope, place it as shown in the following figure.  
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-  
adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.  
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.  
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the  
corner of the envelope.  
1
2
Acceptable  
Unacceptable  
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that  
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second about 170°C (338 °F). The extra flaps and strips  
might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.  
If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles, creases, or black bold lines, open the  
rear cover and try printing again. Keep the rear cover opened during printing.  
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors:  
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the  
edges of the envelope.  
2
-
-
Weight: should not exceed 90 g/m otherwise; jams may occur.  
Construction: should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not  
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.  
contain air.  
-
-
Condition: should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.  
Temperature: should resist the heat and pressure of the machine  
during operation.  
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and well-creased folds.  
Do not use stamped envelopes.  
47  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Media and tray  
Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet.  
Transparency  
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed  
sheets stack up as they are being printed out.  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for use in  
laser printers.  
Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox, such  
as 3R 91331(A4), 3R 2780 (Letter)  
Must withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.  
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.  
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long. Dust and dirt  
may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.  
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully.  
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged  
sunlight.  
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges.  
48  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
 
Media and tray  
-
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other  
indications of separation.  
Labels  
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser  
printers.  
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.  
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause  
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine  
components.  
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The  
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.  
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled,  
bubbled, or otherwise damaged.  
When selecting labels, consider the following factors:  
-
-
-
Adhesives: Should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature.  
Check your machine’s specifications to view the fusing temperature  
(about 170°C (338°F)).  
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them.  
Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing  
serious jams.  
Curl: Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.  
49  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
 
Media and tray  
Card stock/ Custom-sized paper  
Preprinted paper  
When loading preprinted paper, the printed side should be facing up with an  
uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feeding, turn  
the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed.  
In the software application, set the margins to at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)  
away from the edges of the material.  
Must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or  
release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing  
temperature for 0.1 second (about 170°C (338°F)).  
Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely  
affect machine rollers.  
Before you load preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry.  
During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing  
print quality.  
50  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
   
Media and tray  
6
7
Setting the paper size and type  
Preparing originals  
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the  
control panel buttons.  
Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or larger than  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).  
Do not attempt to load the following s of paper, in order to prevent paper  
jam, low print quality and machine damage.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some  
models.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper  
Coated paper  
Onion skin or thin paper  
Wrinkled or creased paper  
Curled or rolled paper  
Torn paper  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup > Paper Size or  
1
Paper Type on the control panel.  
Select the tray and the option you want.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
2
3
Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.  
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry  
before loading.  
The settings set from the machine driver override the settings on the  
control panel.  
Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.  
a To print from an application, open an application and start the print  
menu.  
Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents with other  
unusual characteristics.  
b Open Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on  
c Press the Paper tab and select an appropriate paper.  
If you want to use special-sized paper such as billing paper, select the  
Paper tab > Size > Edit... and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the  
51  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
   
Media and tray  
8
Lift and open the scanner lid.  
1
Loading originals  
You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for  
copying, scanning, and sending a fax(SCX-472x Series only).  
On the scanner glass  
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the best  
scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images. Make sure that no  
originals are in the document feeder. If an original is detected in the document  
feeder, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.  
52  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
     
Media and tray  
Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the  
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.  
2
Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.  
Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid may fall  
on your hands and get hurt.  
Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or  
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.  
In the document feeder  
Using the document feeder, you can load up to 40 sheets of paper (75 g/m2, 20  
lbs bond) for one job.  
Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before  
loading originals.  
1
Close the scanner lid.  
3
Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and  
toner consumption.  
Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout. Always  
If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner lid  
until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid. If the  
book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the scanner  
lid open.  
53  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Media and tray  
Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray. Make sure  
that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on  
the document input tray.  
Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size.  
2
3
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the  
printout. Always keep the glass clean (see "Cleaning the machine" on  
To print on both sides of the paper using the ADF, from the control panel  
press  
(Copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Duplex > 1 -> 2 Side  
Long or 1 -> 2 SideShort and print on one side of the paper, then reload  
the sheet to print on the other side.  
54  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Basic printing  
Select your machine from the Select Printer list.  
3
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Using  
9
Printing  
If you are a Macintosh or Linux user, refer to the "Macintosh printing" on  
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range  
are selected within the Print window.  
4
5
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7.  
Open the document you want to print.  
1
To take advantage of the advanced printing features, click Properties or  
Select Print from the File menu.  
2
To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.  
55  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
     
Basic printing  
10  
Canceling a print job  
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as  
follows:  
You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon  
) in the Windows task bar.  
(
You can also cancel the current job by pressing  
control panel.  
(Stop/Clear) on the  
56  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
 
Basic printing  
11  
Click Properties or Preferences.  
4
Opening printing preferences  
The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may  
differ depending on the machine in use.  
When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a  
warning mark  
option but it is not recommended, and an  
select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment.  
or  
. An  
mark means you can select that certain  
mark means you cannot  
Open the document you want to print.  
1
2
3
Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.  
Select your machine from the Select Printer.  
You can check the machine’s current status pressing the Printer Status  
Using a favorite setting  
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the  
Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use.  
To save a Presets item, follow these steps:  
57  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
     
Basic printing  
12  
Change the settings as needed on each tab.  
1
Using help  
Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.  
2
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and  
press F1 on your keyboard.  
13  
Eco printing  
The Eco function reduces toner consumption and paper usage. The Eco  
function allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco-friendly printing.  
Click  
saved.  
(Add). When you save Presets, all current driver settings are  
If you press the Eco button from the control panel, eco mode is enabled. The  
default setting of Eco mode is Double-sided printing (Long Edge), Multiple  
Pages per Side (2), Skip blank pages, and Toner Save.  
3
Select more options and click  
(Update), settings will be added to the  
Presets you made. To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop-  
down list. The machine is now set to print according to the settings you  
have selected.  
Depending on the printer driver you use, Skip blank pages may not work  
properly. If Skip blank pages feature does not work properly, set the  
feature from the Easy Eco Driver (see "Easy Eco Driver" on page 257).  
To delete saved settings, select it from the Presets drop-down list and click  
(Delete).  
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting  
Default Preset from the Presets drop-down list.  
58  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
       
Basic printing  
Change Template: Follow the settings from Syncthru™ Web Service.  
Before you select this item, you must set the eco function in  
SyncThru™ Web Service> Settings tab > Machine Settings >  
System > Eco > Settings.  
Setting Eco mode on the control panel  
The settings set from the machine’s driver override the settings on the  
control panel.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
3
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
Setting eco mode on the driver  
some models.  
Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode. When you see the eco image (  
means the eco mode is currently enabled.  
), that  
Select  
the control panel.  
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup > Eco Settings on  
1
2
Eco options  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Printer Default: Follows the settings from the machine's control panel.  
Default Mode: Select this to turn on or off the eco mode. (Duplex  
(long edge)/Toner save/2-up/Skip blank pages)  
None: Disables Eco mode.  
-
-
Off: Set the eco mode off.  
Eco Printing: Enables eco mode. Activate the various Eco items you want to  
use.  
On: Set the eco mode on.  
Password: If the administrator has enabled Eco mode, you have to  
enter the password to change the status.  
If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru™ Web  
Service (Settings tab > Machine Settings > System > Eco > Settings), the  
On force message appears. You have to enter the password to change the  
eco mode status.  
59  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Basic printing  
Result simulator  
Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide, used  
electricity, and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you  
selected.  
The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed  
paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled.  
Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2, energy, and paper from IEA,  
the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and  
www.remanufacturing.org.uk. Each model has a different index.  
The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing  
power consupmtion of this machine.  
The actual saved or reduced amount may differ depending on the operating  
system used, computing performance, application software, connection  
method, media, media size, job complexity, etc.  
60  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Basic copying  
15  
For special printing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Copy menu"  
Changing the settings for each copy  
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and  
easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for each copy,  
use the copy function buttons on the control panel.  
14  
Basic copy  
If you press  
(Stop/Clear) while setting the copy options, all of the  
Select  
(copy) on the control panel.  
1
2
options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and  
returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically return to their  
default status after the machine completes the copy in progress.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
Accessing menus may differ from model to model (see "Accessing the  
If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge,  
Darkness, Contrast, Original, and more by using the control panel  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
3
Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if  
necessary.  
4
5
Darkness  
Press  
(Start).  
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can adjust  
the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.  
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press  
(Stop/  
Clear) and the copying will stop.  
61  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
           
Basic copying  
Select  
control panel.  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Darkness on the  
Select  
control panel.  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Original type on the  
1
2
3
1
2
Or select Darkness button on the control panel.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.  
For example, the Light+5 being the lightest, and the Dark+5 being the  
darkest.  
Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.  
If texts in the printout is blurry, select Text to get the clear texts.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.  
Contrast  
Press (Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3
The Contrast menu lets you increase or decrease the difference between the  
bright and dark areas of an image.  
Reduced or enlarged copy  
Select  
control panel.  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Contrast on the  
1
2
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400% when  
you copy original documents from the scanner glass.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Select Dark to heighten the contrast and select Light to reduce it.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3
If the machine set to Eco mode, reduce and enlarge features are not  
available.  
Original  
The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the  
document for the current copy job.  
62  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
     
Basic copying  
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and  
the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original. This  
feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.  
To select from the predefined copy sizes  
Select  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge on  
1
the control panel.  
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.  
If the machine set to Eco mode, this feature is not available.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Press (Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
2
3
For better image quality, Select  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy  
Feature > Original Type > Photo on the control panel.  
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate  
Select  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature > Reduce/Enlarge >  
1
Press ID Copy on the control panel.  
Custom on the control panel.  
1
2
Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
2
3
4
Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass  
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of  
your copy.  
16  
ID card copying  
Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display.  
3
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.  
63  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
   
Basic copying  
Press Start.  
4
If you do not press the  
copied.  
(Start) button, only the front side will be  
Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side  
and Press [Start].  
If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be  
printed.  
Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows  
5
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.  
Press Start.  
6
64  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
Basic scanning  
For special scanning features, refer to the Advanced Guide (see "Scan  
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection, or select  
Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager >  
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PCSettings.  
17  
Basic Scanning  
Select the application program you want and press OK.  
3
Default setting is My Documents.  
This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals.  
This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine.  
You can add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved in  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager >  
Scan to PCSettings.  
Switch to advanced mode. >  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for  
some models.  
if you want to scan using the network, refer to the Advanced Guide (see  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
4
5
Scanning begins.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
1
2
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users name\My  
Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating  
system or the application you are using.  
Select  
(scan) > Scan to PC > Local PC on the control panel.  
65  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
     
Basic faxing  
18  
This function is not supported for SCX-470X Series (see"Control panel  
Preparing to fax  
For special faxing features, refer to the Advanced Guide (See "Fax  
SCX-470x Series does not support the fax features.  
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord to  
Installation Guide how to make a connection. The method of making a  
telephone connection is different from one country to another.  
You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For more  
information ask your internet service provider.  
We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN: Public  
Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone lines to use  
a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can  
improve the connection quality by using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter  
eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or  
Internet quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the  
machine, contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro-  
filter.  
19  
Sending a fax  
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder or  
the scanner glass. If the originals are placed on both the document  
feeder and the scanner glass, the machine will read the originals on the  
document feeder first, which has higher priority in scanning.  
SCX-470x Series does not support the fax features.  
1
2
3
Line port  
Micro filter  
DSL modem / Telephone line  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
1
2
SCX-470x Series does not support the fax features.  
Select  
(fax) on the control panel.  
66  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
     
Basic faxing  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see  
3
3
Enter the destination fax number.  
Press On Hook Dial on the control panel or lift the handset.  
4
4
5
6
Press  
(Start) on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and  
Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.  
5
send the fax to the destinations.  
Press  
(Start) on the control panel when you hear a high-pitched fax  
signal from the remote fax machine.  
If you want to send a fax directly from your computer, use Samsung  
Sending a fax to multiple destinations  
When you want to cancel a fax job, press  
machine starts transmission.  
(Stop/Clear) before the  
You can use the multiple send feature, which allows you to send a fax to multiple  
locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote  
station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased from memory  
If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message asking to  
place another page.  
Sending a fax manually  
You cannot send faxes with this feature if you chosen super fine as an option  
or if the fax is in color.  
Perform the following to send a fax using (On Hook Dial) on the control  
panel. If your machine is a handset model, you can send a fax using the handset  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
1
Select  
(fax) on the control panel.  
2
Select  
(fax) on the control panel.  
2
67  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
 
Basic faxing  
20  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (see  
3
Receiving a fax  
Select  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Multi Send on the control panel.  
4
5
SCX-470x Series does not support the fax features.  
Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.  
You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using  
Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax, the  
machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically  
receives the fax.  
the  
(Address book) button (see Advanced Guide).  
Enter the second fax number and press OK.  
6
7
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.  
21  
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat  
steps 5 and 6. You can add up to 10 destinations.  
Adjusting the document settings  
SCX-470x Series does not support the fax features.  
Once you have entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another  
group dial number.  
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your original’s  
status to get the best quality.  
When you have finished entering fax numbers, select No at the Another  
No.? prompt and press OK.  
8
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the  
order in which you entered them.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some  
models.  
68  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
   
Basic faxing  
Color Fax: Original with colors.  
Resolution  
The default document settings produce good results when using typical text-  
based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality, or  
contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality  
fax.  
Memory transmission is not available in this mode.  
You can only send a color fax if the machine you are communicating with  
supports color fax reception and you send the fax manually.  
Select  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Resolution on the control  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
1
2
3
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Darkness  
Standard: Originals with normal sized characters.  
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.  
Fine: Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals  
printed using a dot-matrix printer.  
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the default  
Super Fine: Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine  
mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are  
communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution.  
Select  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Darkness on the control  
1
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The  
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.  
Select a darkness level you want.  
Press (Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
2
3
When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine  
with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine  
resolution, the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode  
supported by the other fax machine.  
Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of gray or photographs.  
69  
2. Menu overview and basic setup  
   
3. Maintenance  
This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your  
machine.  
 
Ordering supplies and accessories  
Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies, and maintenance parts.  
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories, and maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine.  
You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, and then select your country/region to obtain the contact information for service.  
71  
3. Maintenance  
   
Available supplies  
When supplies reach the end of their life spans, you can order the following s of  
supplies for your machine:  
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner  
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner. Samsung cannot  
guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair  
required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not  
be covered under the machine’s warranty.  
a
Type  
Part name  
MLT-D103S  
Average yield  
Standard yield toner  
cartridge  
Approx. 1,500 pages  
High yield toner  
cartridge  
Approx. 2,500 pages  
MLT-D103L  
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.  
Depending on the options, percentage of image area and job mode used,  
the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ.  
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must be  
purchased in the same country as the machine you are using. Otherwise,  
new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your  
machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other  
supplies according to the specific country conditions.  
72  
3. Maintenance  
   
Available maintenance parts  
To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the machine. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service  
provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its  
“Average yield”.  
Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The purpose of which  
is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met.  
a
Parts  
Document feeder rubber pad  
Transfer roller  
Fuser unit  
Average yield  
Approx. 20,000 pages  
Approx. 100,000 pages  
Approx. 100,000 pages  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
Pickup roller  
Retard roller  
Forward Roller  
Feed Roller  
a. It will be affected by the operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media, media size and job  
complexity.  
73  
3. Maintenance  
   
Redistributing toner  
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life:  
White streaks or light printing occurs and/or density variation side to side.  
The Status LED blinks red.  
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still  
occur even after you have redistributed the toner.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water: hot water sets toner into fabric.  
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
74  
3. Maintenance  
   
Replacing the toner cartridge  
Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package. They might scratch the drum of the cartridge.  
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.  
Shake the toner cartridge thorougly, it will increase the initial print quality.  
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.  
75  
3. Maintenance  
   
Replacing the toner cartridge  
When a toner cartridge has reached the end of life, the machine will stop printing.  
76  
3. Maintenance  
Monitoring the supplies life  
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the corresponding parts, if  
necessary.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Supplies Life on the control panel.  
1
2
Select the option you want and press OK.  
Supplies Info: Prints the supply information page.  
Total: Displays the total number of pages printed.  
ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages printed by using the document feeder.  
Platen Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned by using scanner glass.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
3
77  
3. Maintenance  
   
Setting the toner low alert  
If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears. You can set the option for whether or not  
this message or LED appears.  
Select  
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance > Toner Low Alert on the control panel.  
1
2
3
Select the option you want.  
Press OK to save the selection.  
78  
3. Maintenance  
   
Cleaning the machine  
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing  
condition and use your machine longer.  
Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvents, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the  
cabinet.  
If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum  
cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you.  
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner  
specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.  
1
Cleaning the outside  
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.  
79  
3. Maintenance  
     
Cleaning the machine  
2
Cleaning the inside  
Use a dry lint-free cloth to clean the machine.  
If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine.  
Before opening the front cover, close the output support first.  
80  
3. Maintenance  
 
Cleaning the machine  
3
Cleaning the pickup roller  
Before opening the front cover, close the output support first.  
If your machine has a power switch, turn the power switch before cleaning the machine.  
81  
3. Maintenance  
 
Cleaning the machine  
82  
3. Maintenance  
Cleaning the machine  
4
Cleaning the scan unit  
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed.  
Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.  
1
Lift and open the scanner lid.  
2
Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.  
3
1
2
3
4
Scanner lid  
Scanner glass  
Document feeder glass  
White bar  
Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry.  
4
83  
3. Maintenance  
   
Cleaning the machine  
Close the scanner lid.  
5
84  
3. Maintenance  
4. Troubleshooting  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.  
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. If your machine  
has a display screen, check the message on the display screen first to solve the error.  
If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter, refer to the Troubleshooting  
chapter in the Advanced User's Guide.  
If you cannot find a solution in the User's Guide or the problem persists, call for service.  
 
Tips for avoiding paper jams  
By selecting the correct medias, most paper jams can be avoided. To avoid paper jams, refer to the following guidelines:  
Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (see "Tray overview" on page 41).  
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.  
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.  
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.  
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.  
Do not mix paper s in a tray.  
86  
4. Troubleshooting  
   
Clearing original document jams  
When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning message appears on the display.  
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly and carefully.  
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or mixed paper- originals.  
87  
4. Troubleshooting  
   
Clearing original document jams  
1
Original paper jam in front of scanner  
88  
4. Troubleshooting  
Clearing original document jams  
2
Original paper jam inside of scanner  
89  
4. Troubleshooting  
Clearing original document jams  
3
Original paper jam in exit area of scanner  
Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.  
1
Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.  
2
90  
4. Troubleshooting  
Clearing paper jams  
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently.  
4
In tray  
91  
4. Troubleshooting  
     
Clearing paper jams  
5
In the manual tray  
92  
4. Troubleshooting  
 
Clearing paper jams  
6
Inside the machine  
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine.  
93  
4. Troubleshooting  
 
Clearing paper jams  
7
In the exit area  
94  
4. Troubleshooting  
 
Clearing paper jams  
8
In the duplex unit area  
1
2
95  
4. Troubleshooting  
 
Understanding the status LED  
The color of the LED indicates the machine's current status.  
Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country.  
To resolve the error, look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part.  
You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers’s Printing Status or Smart Panel program window.  
If the problem persists, call a service representative.  
Status  
Green  
Red  
Description  
Status LED  
Off  
The machine is off-line.  
When the backlight blinks, the machine is receiving or printing data.  
Blinking  
On  
The machine is on-line and can be used.  
Blinking  
A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display message. When  
the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. For some models that does not support the display screen on the  
control panel, this feature is not applicable.  
Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for  
replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see "Redistributing toner"  
a
On  
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge  
The cover is opened. Close the cover.  
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.  
The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message (see "Understanding display messages" on  
96  
4. Troubleshooting  
   
Understanding the status LED  
Status  
Description  
b
Blue  
Blue  
On  
When the machine is connected to a wireless network, WPS LED lights on blue.  
WPS LED  
On  
Off  
On  
The machine is in power save mode.  
Power  
LED  
The machine is in ready mode or machine’s power is off.  
Eco button  
Green  
Eco mode is on. Duplex, 2-up, toner save on, skip blank page feature will automatically be applied when printing (see"Eco  
Off  
Eco mode is off.  
a. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages  
may be affected by operating environment, percentage of image area, printing interval, graphics, media and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is  
on and the printer stops printing.  
b. SCX-472x Series only.  
97  
4. Troubleshooting  
Understanding display messages  
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s status  
or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and their  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Paper Jam  
in Manual Feeder  
Paper has jammed in  
the manual feeder.  
meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary.  
If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing job  
again. If the problem persists, call a service representative.  
Paper Jam  
inside machine  
Paper has jammed in  
the inside machine.  
When you call for service, provide the service representative with the  
contents of display message.  
Paper Jam  
in exit area  
Paper has jammed in  
the paper exit area.  
Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the  
options or models.  
[error number] indicates the error number.  
[tray type] indicates the tray number.  
Paper Jam  
bottom of duplex  
Paper has jammed in  
the duplex area.  
Paper Jam top of duplex  
9
Paper Jam-related messages  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Document jam  
Remove jam  
The loaded original  
document has  
jammed in the  
Clear the jam (see  
"Clearing original  
document feeder.  
Paper Jam  
in tray  
Paper has jammed in  
the paper feed area.  
98  
4. Troubleshooting  
   
Understanding display messages  
10  
Toner-related messages  
Message  
Meaning  
A toner cartridge is not installed.  
Suggested solutions  
Install a toner cartridge.  
Install Toner Cartridge  
Not Compatible  
Toner cartridge  
The toner cartridge you have installed is not for your machine. Install a Samsung-genuine toner cartridge, designed for your  
machine.  
Prepare new cartridge  
Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge. The  
estimated cartridge life of toner is close.  
Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement. You may temporarily  
increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner (see  
99  
4. Troubleshooting  
Understanding display messages  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Replace new cartridge  
Toner Exhausted  
A toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life. The  
machine stops printing.  
You can choose Stop or Continue as shown on the control panel.  
If you select Stop, the printer stops printing and you cannot print  
any more without changing the cartridge. If you select Continue,  
the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be  
guaranteed.  
Estimated cartridge life means the expected or  
estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the  
average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant  
to ISO/IEC 19752 (see "Available supplies" on page 72).  
The number of pages may be affected by operating  
environment, percentage of image area, printing  
interval, media, percentage of image area, and media  
size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge  
even when replace new cartridge appears and the  
machine stops printing.  
Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this  
message appears. Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in  
printing quality issues (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on  
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine  
Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured.  
Samsung cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner  
cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of  
using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be  
covered under the machine warranty.  
If the machine stops printing, replace the toner cartridge (see  
100  
4. Troubleshooting  
Understanding display messages  
11  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Tray-related messages  
Wireless  
Network Error  
Wireless module is not Call for service.  
installed.  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
13  
Output bin full  
Remove paper  
The output tray is full.  
Remove papers from the  
output tray, the printer  
resumes printing.  
Misc. messages  
Paper Empty  
in [tray type]  
There is no paper in tray Load paper in tray (see  
or manual feeder.  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Door of scanner is  
open  
The document feeder  
cover is not securely  
latched.  
Close the cover until it  
locks into place.  
Tray Paper  
mismatch  
Load the required size  
paper.  
The paper size specified  
in the printer properties  
does not match the  
Error [error  
number]  
Turn off then on  
The machine unit cannot Reboot the power and try  
be controlled.  
the printing job again. If  
the problem persists,  
please call for service.  
Manual Paper  
mismatch  
paper you are loading.  
Memory Full  
Remove Job  
The memory is full.  
Print or remove the  
received fax job in Secure  
Receive (see Advanced  
Guide).  
12  
Network-related messages  
Scanner Locked  
The scanner is locked.  
Reboot the power. If the  
problem persists, please  
call for service.  
Message  
Meaning  
Suggested solutions  
Network Problem:  
IP Conflict  
The network IP address Check the IP address and  
you have set is being  
reset it if necessary (see  
used by someone else. Advanced Guide).  
101  
4. Troubleshooting  
5. Appendix  
This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations.  
 
Specifications  
1
General specifications  
The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com for possible changes in information.  
Items  
Description  
406 x 338 x 384mm (15.98 x 13.30 x 15.12 inches)  
a
Width x Length x Height  
Dimension  
Machine with consumables  
10.98 Kg  
Weight  
b
Ready mode  
26 dB (A)  
Noise Level  
Print mode  
Less than 50 dB (A)  
Less than 53 dB (A)  
52 dB (A)  
Copy mode  
Scan mode (scanner glass)  
Scan mode (document feeder) 53 dB (A)  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Operation  
10 to 32°C (50 to 89.6°F)  
Storage (packed)  
Operation  
-20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F)  
20 to 80% RH  
Storage (packed)  
110 volt models  
220 volt models  
10 to 90% RH  
c
AC 110 - 127 V  
AC 220 - 240 V  
Power rating  
103  
5. Appendix  
     
Specifications  
Items  
Description  
Power consumption  
Average operating mode  
Less than 400W  
Less than 50 W  
Less than 3.0 W  
Ready mode  
Power save mode  
Power off mode  
d
Less than 0.2 W (0.1 W )  
e
Module  
T77H262  
Wireless  
a. Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset.  
b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: basic machine installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.  
c. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and of current (A) for your machine.  
d. For the machine that has a power switch.  
e. Wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
104  
5. Appendix  
Specifications  
2
Print media specifications  
a
Print media weight/Capacity  
Type  
Size  
Dimensions  
b
Tray  
Manual feeder  
2
2
Letter  
Legal  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)  
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)  
216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)  
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)  
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)  
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)  
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches)  
60 to 163 g/m (16 to 43 lbs bond)  
60 to 220 g/m (16 to 59 lbs  
bond)  
2
250 sheets of 80 g/m (21 lbs bond)  
2
1 sheet of 80 g/m (21 lbs  
bond)  
US Folio  
A4  
Oficio  
JIS B5  
ISO B5  
Executive  
A5  
Plain paper  
A6  
105  
5. Appendix  
   
Specifications  
a
Print media weight/Capacity  
Type  
Size  
Dimensions  
b
Tray  
Not available in tray  
Manual feeder  
2
Envelope  
Monarch  
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)  
60 to 220 g/m (16 to 59 lbs  
bond)  
Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)  
Envelope  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
Envelope C6  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)  
162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)  
114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches)  
Refer to the Plain paper section  
2
2
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
91 to 105 g/m (24 to 28 lbs bond)  
91 to 105 g/m (24 to 28 lbs  
Thick paper  
Thicker paper  
Thin paper  
bond)  
2
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Not available in tray  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
164 to 220 g/m (44 to 59 lbs  
bond)  
2
2
Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section  
paper section  
60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19 lbs bond)  
60 to 70 g/m (16 to 19 lbs bond)  
2
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Not available in tray  
Not available in tray  
138 to 146 g/m (37 to 39 lbs  
bond)  
Transparency  
Letter, A4  
2
Letter, Legal, US Refer to the Plain paper section  
120 to 150 g/m (32 to 40 lbs  
Folio, A4, JIS B5,  
ISO B5,  
bond)  
c
Labels  
Executive, A5  
106  
5. Appendix  
Specifications  
a
Print media weight/Capacity  
Type  
Size  
Dimensions  
b
Tray  
Manual feeder  
2
2
Letter, Legal, US Refer to the Plain paper section  
Folio, A4, JIS B5,  
ISO B5,  
121 to 163 g/m (32 to 43 lbs bond)  
121 to 163 g/m (32 to 43 lbs  
bond)  
Card stock  
Executive, A5,  
Postcard 4x6  
2
2
Refer to the Plain paper section  
Refer to the Plain  
paper section  
106 to 120 g/m (28 to 32 lbs bond)  
106 to 120 g/m (28 to 32 lbs  
bond)  
Bond paper  
2
d e  
Manual feeder: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches)  
60 to 163 g/m (16 to 43 lbs bond) ,  
Minimum size (custom)  
Maximum size (custom)  
Tray: 105 x 148.5 mm (4.13 x 5.85 inches)  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)  
a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.  
b. 1 sheet for manual feeder.  
c. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.  
d. The paper types available in the manual feeder: Plan, Thick, Thicker, Thin, Cotton, Colored, Pre-printed, Recycled, Envelope, Transparency, Labels, Cardstock, Bond, Archive  
e. The paper types available in tray: Plan, Thick, Thin, Recycled, Cardstock, Bond, Archive  
107  
5. Appendix  
Specifications  
3
System requirements  
Microsoft® Windows®  
Requirement (recommended)  
Operating system  
CPU  
RAM  
64 MB (128 MB)  
128 MB (256 MB)  
128 MB (512 MB)  
512 MB (2 GB)  
512 MB (1 GB)  
1 GB (2 GB)  
free HDD space  
600 MB  
Windows® 2000  
Windows® XP  
Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz)  
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)  
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz)  
Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz  
1.5 GB  
Windows Server® 2003  
Windows Server® 2008  
Windows Vista®  
Windows® 7  
1.25 GB to 2 GB  
10 GB  
15 GB  
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher  
16 GB  
Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme).  
DVD-R/W Drive  
Windows Server® 2008 R2  
Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster)  
512 MB (2 GB)  
10 GB  
108  
5. Appendix  
   
Specifications  
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems.  
Users who have administrator rights can install the software.  
Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.  
For Windows 2000, Services Pack 4 or higher is required.  
Macintosh  
Requirements (Recommended)  
RAM  
Operating system  
CPU  
Free HDD space  
Mac OS X 10.4  
Mac OS X 10.5  
Intel® processors  
PowerPC G4/G5  
128 MB for a powerPC based Mac  
(512 MB)  
1 GB  
512 MB for an Intel-based Mac (1 GB)  
Intel® processors  
512 MB (1 GB)  
1 GB  
867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/  
G5  
Mac OS X 10.6  
Mac OS X 10.7  
Intel® processors  
Intel® processors  
1 GB (2 GB)  
2 GB  
1 GB  
4 GB  
109  
5. Appendix  
 
Specifications  
Linux  
Items  
Requirements  
Operating system  
Redhat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)  
Fedora 5 ~ 13 (32/64 bit)  
SuSE Linux 10.1 (32 bit)  
OpenSuSE® 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2 (32/64 bit)  
Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)  
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04 (32/64 bit)  
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)  
Debian 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)  
CPU  
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)  
512 MB (1 GB)  
RAM  
Free HDD space  
1 GB (2 GB)  
Unix  
Items  
Requirements  
Operating system  
Sun Solaris 9, 10 (x86, SPARC)  
HP-UX 11.0, 11i v1, 11i v2, 11i v3 (PA-RISC, Itanium)  
IBM AIX 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4  
110  
5. Appendix  
   
Specifications  
Items  
Requirements  
Free HDD space  
Up to 100 MB  
4
Network environment  
Network and wireless models only (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the  
machine.  
Items  
Specifications  
Network interface  
Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX Wired Lan  
802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN (SCX-472x Series only)  
Network operating system  
Windows 2000/Server 2003 /Server 2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2  
Various Linux OS  
Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.7  
Unix  
111  
5. Appendix  
 
Specifications  
Items  
Specifications  
Network protocols  
TCP/IPv4  
DHCP, BOOTP  
DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP  
Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD  
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec  
TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)  
Wireless security  
Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK)  
Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES  
112  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with  
several regulatory statements.  
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be  
followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:  
5
Laser safety statement  
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21  
CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is  
certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-  
1 : 2007.  
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and  
printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above  
a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service  
condition.  
6
Ozone safety  
Warning  
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from  
laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage  
your eyes.  
This product’s ozone emission rate is under 0.1 ppm. Because  
ozone is heavier than air, keep the product in a place with good  
ventilation.  
113  
5. Appendix  
   
Regulatory information  
7
9
Mercury Safety  
Recycling  
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal  
Laws.(U.S.A. only)  
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an  
environmentally responsible manner.  
8
10  
Power saver  
China only  
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology  
that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.  
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of  
time, power consumption is automatically lowered.  
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S.  
marks.  
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://  
For ENERGY STAR certified models, the ENRGY STAR label will be  
on your machine. Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR  
certified.  
114  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
11  
(The United States of America only)  
Correct disposal of this product (Waste electrical &  
electronic equipment)  
Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler. To find the nearest  
recycling location, go to our website: www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect Or  
call, (877) 278 - 0799  
(Applicable in the european union and other  
european countries with separate collection  
systems)  
12  
Correct disposal of batteries in this product  
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the  
product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable)  
should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of  
their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or  
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these  
items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the  
sustainable reuse of material resources.  
(Applicable in the European Union and other  
European countries with separate battery return  
systems.)  
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the  
batteries in this product should not be disposed with other  
household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the  
chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains  
mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive  
2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances  
can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect  
natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate  
batteries from other s of waste and recycle them through your local,  
free battery return system.  
Household users should contact either the retailer where they  
purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of  
where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe  
recycling.  
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and  
conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic  
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for  
disposal.  
115  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
13  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed  
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may  
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this  
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
Taiwan only  
14  
Radio frequency emissions  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
FCC information to the user  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions:  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to  
which the receiver is connected.  
This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.  
This device must accept any interference received, including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer  
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the  
equipment.  
116  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the  
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not  
include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches)  
from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless  
device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the  
RF exposure limits as set by the FCC.  
Canadian radio interference regulations  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise  
emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing  
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and  
Science Canada.  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any  
other antenna or transmitter.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques  
applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le  
matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et  
Sciences Canada.  
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation of the device.  
15  
United States of America  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way.  
Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.  
Contact manufacturer for service.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15  
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication  
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in  
your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.  
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the  
United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label.  
117  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
17  
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:  
Germany only  
Turkey only  
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination  
the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at  
distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain  
a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device  
cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.  
18  
16  
Russia only  
19  
Canada only  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. / Le  
present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables  
d’Industrie Canada.  
118  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number  
of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of  
an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the  
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five. / L’indice  
d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de  
terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique. La  
terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de  
dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la  
sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas cinq.  
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,  
equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required  
in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and  
regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render  
any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company  
communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of such terminal  
equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer  
shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity  
to maintain uninterrupted service  
20  
21  
Fax Branding  
Ringer Equivalence Number  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any  
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a  
telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin  
at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the  
transmission the following information:  
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine  
may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine. In some  
instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed  
on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have  
“overloaded” the line. Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone  
line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls, especially  
ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of  
the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure  
proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may  
not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating  
properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may  
cause harm to the telephone network.  
1
2
the date and time of transmission  
identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the  
message; and  
3
telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity  
or individual.  
119  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements  
adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains,  
among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.  
If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.  
If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we  
recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the  
telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or  
telephone and electronic specialty stores.  
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to  
emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the  
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give  
you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.  
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not  
expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to  
operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm  
to the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the  
customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is  
impractical, the company may temporarily cease service, providing that  
they:  
This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.  
This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.  
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of  
a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.  
a promptly notify the customer.  
b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.  
c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal  
Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC  
Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.  
22  
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)  
Important  
You should also know that:  
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug  
and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit  
the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost  
the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover.  
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.  
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone  
line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception  
problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other  
equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your  
machine.  
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.  
120  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable.  
However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug  
sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded  
plug.  
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”  
or colored red.  
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.  
23  
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.  
Declaration of conformity (European countries)  
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you  
plug it into a socket.  
Approvals and Certifications  
Important warning:  
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [SCX-470xND Series]  
is incompliance with the essential requirements and other  
relevantprovisions of Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC  
Directive (2004/108/EC).  
You must earth this machine.  
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:  
Hereby, Samsung Electronics, declares that this [SCX-472xFW Series,  
SCX-472xHW Series, SCX-472xFD Series, SCX-472xHD Series, SCX-  
472xHN Series, SCX-470xDN Series] is in compliance with the  
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE  
Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Green and Yellow: Earth  
Blue: Neutral  
Brown: Live  
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do  
the following:  
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at  
www.samsung.com, go to Support > Download center and enter  
your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC.  
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E”  
or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.  
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of  
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or  
colored black.  
the member states related to low voltage equipment.  
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC, approximation of the laws of  
the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.  
121  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and  
telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their  
conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced  
standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
representative.  
European radio approval information (for products  
fitted with EU-approved radio devices)  
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless  
communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present  
(embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This  
section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label  
to verify the presence of wireless devices.  
EC Certification  
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal  
Equipment Directive (FAX)  
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only  
qualified for use in the European Union or associated  
areas if a CE mark with a Notified Body Registration  
Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.  
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European  
single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network  
(PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed  
to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European  
countries:  
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in  
you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European  
Commission through the R&TTE directive.  
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.  
European states qualified under wireless approvals:  
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application  
of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the European  
Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document  
(EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure  
network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed  
against, and is fully compliant with, all of the relevant advisory notes contained  
in this document.  
EU countries  
European states with restrictions on use:  
EU  
In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2454-2483.5 MHz for devices  
above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless  
EEA/EFTA countries  
122  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
No limitations at this time  
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in  
your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because  
the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less  
energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and  
recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use.  
Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact  
during normal operation.  
24  
Israel only  
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless  
device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not  
include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8  
inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting.  
25  
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any  
other antenna or transmitter.  
Regulatory compliance statements  
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of  
common restrictions are listed below:  
Wireless guidance  
Low power, Radio LAN devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication  
devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in  
your printer system. The following section is a general overview of  
considerations while operating a wireless device.  
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment  
on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless  
devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also  
known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices are  
examples of devices that provide wireless communication.  
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in  
the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in  
your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio  
Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the  
wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for  
requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be  
allowed.  
123  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or  
services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless  
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen  
or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of  
wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments  
where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the  
applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the  
wireless device.  
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices.  
Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling  
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio  
Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the  
use of a wireless device in the destination country.  
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless  
device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields  
are in place and the system is fully assembled.  
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any  
way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use  
it. Contact manufacturer for service.  
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be  
used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact  
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.  
124  
5. Appendix  
Regulatory information  
26  
China only  
125  
5. Appendix  
Copyright  
© 2011 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.  
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.  
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.  
Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
True, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.  
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.  
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.  
REV. 1.1  
126  
5. Appendix  
   
User’s Guide  
SCX-472x Series  
SCX-470x Series  
ADVANCED  
ADVANCED  
This guide provides information about installation, advanced configuration,  
operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments.  
Some features may not be available depending on models or countries.  
BASIC  
This guide provides information concerning installation, basic operation and troubleshooting  
on windows.  
 
1. Software Installation  
This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the  
machine is connected via a cable. A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using  
the cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network  
If you are a Windows OS user, refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine’s driver (see  
Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter (118 inches).  
 
Installation for Macintosh  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.  
1
14  
15  
For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.7, open the Applications folder > System  
Preferences and click Print & Fax.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
Click Add on the Printer List.  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.  
3
For Mac OS X 10.5 -10.7, click the “+” folder icon; a display window  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
will pop up.  
4
Click Continue.  
Click Default Browser and find the USB connection.  
5
16  
17  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click Default and find the USB connection.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
6
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung  
in Print Using and your machine name in Model.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
7
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your  
computer appears, click Continue.  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, if Auto Select does not work properly, select  
8
Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using.  
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default  
machine.  
Click Continue on the User Options Pane.  
9
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be  
installed.  
10  
Click Add.  
18  
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.  
To install the fax driver:  
Enter the password and click OK.  
a Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Fax Queue Creator.  
b Your machine appears on the Printer List  
c Select machine to use and click Create button  
11  
Installing software requires you to restart your computer. Click Continue  
Installation.  
12  
After the installation is finished, click Restart.  
13  
131  
1. Software Installation  
   
Reinstallation for Macintosh  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
2
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.  
3
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Uninstaller OS X icon.  
4
Enter the password and click OK.  
5
When the uninstall is done, click OK.  
6
If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup Utility  
or Print & Fax.  
132  
1. Software Installation  
   
Installation for Linux  
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to  
Support or Downloads).  
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon  
and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you  
have any difficulties, consult the on-screen help that is available through your  
system menu or from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified  
Driver Configurator or Image Manager.  
1
Installing the Unified Linux Driver  
2
Installing the Smart Panel  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the  
Login field and enter the system password.  
2
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the  
Login field and enter the system password.  
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you  
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.  
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you  
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.  
From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package  
3
to your computer.  
From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel package to your  
computer.  
3
Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package.  
4
Double click cdroot > autorun.  
Right-click the Smart Panel package and extract the package.  
5
4
When the welcome screen appears, click Next.  
Double click cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh.  
6
5
When the installation is complete, click Finish.  
7
133  
1. Software Installation  
     
Installation for Linux  
3
Installing the Printer Settings Utility  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the  
Login field and enter the system password.  
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you  
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.  
From the Samsung website, download the Printer Settings Utility  
package to your computer.  
3
Right-click the Printer Settings Utility package and extract the  
package.  
4
Double click cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh.  
5
134  
1. Software Installation  
 
Reinstallation for Linux  
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the  
Login field and enter the system password.  
2
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you  
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.  
Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen  
appears, type in the following.  
3
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/  
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh  
Click Uninstall.  
4
Click Next.  
5
Click Finish.  
6
135  
1. Software Installation  
   
2. Using a Network-  
Connected Machine  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software.  
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model (see "Features by  
 
Useful network programs  
2
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a  
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing  
several machines on the network is possible.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service  
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.  
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing  
network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network  
machines from any site with corporate internet access.  
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
1
3
SyncThru™ Web Service  
SetIP wired network setup  
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the  
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually  
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.  
Check the supplies information and status.  
Customize machine settings.  
Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine  
status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain  
person's email automatically.  
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be  
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to  
various network environments.  
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.  
137  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wired network setup  
4
5
Printing a network configuration report  
Setting IP address  
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel  
that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set  
up a network.  
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be  
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.  
The machine has the display screen: Press the  
(Menu) button on the  
control panel and select Network > Network Config. (Network  
Configuration).  
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements.  
In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP  
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network.  
The machine has the touch screen: Press Setup from the Main screen >  
Network > Next > Network Configuration.  
The machine does not have the display screen: Press the  
(Cancel or  
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Windows)  
Stop/Clear) button for more than 4~5 seconds on the control panel.  
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control  
Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.  
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC  
address and IP address.  
For example:  
Install this program from the supplied CD-ROM by double-click  
Application > SetIP > Setup.exe.  
1
MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78  
IP Address: 192.0.0.192  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
2
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.  
3
Turn on the machine.  
4
From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung  
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.  
5
138  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
           
Wired network setup  
Click the  
IP configuration window.  
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/  
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Macintosh)  
6
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System  
Preferences > Security > Firewall.  
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as  
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information  
assigned by a network manager before proceeding.  
7
The following instructions may vary from your model.  
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.  
1
Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select  
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.  
2
Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select  
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows the  
3
printer’s name and IP address information.  
Click the  
IP configuration window.  
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/  
4
5
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report  
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes  
0015992951A8.  
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In  
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by  
a network manager before proceeding.  
Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the  
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are  
correct.  
8
139  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wired network setup  
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report  
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes  
0015992951A8.  
Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report  
without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes  
0015992951A8.  
Select Apply, then OK, and OK again.  
The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration  
Report.  
6
5
Quit Safari.  
7
IPv4 configuration using SetIP (Linux)  
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from System  
Preferences or Administrator.  
The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems.  
Open /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.  
1
Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file.  
2
Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.  
3
Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In  
a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by  
a network manager before proceeding.  
4
140  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Installing driver over the network  
Select Install Now.  
3
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
The machine that does not support the network interface, it will not be  
able to use this feature (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
6
Windows  
Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered  
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set (see "Setting IP  
1
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the installation  
procedure, click Cancel to close the window.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection  
and choose individual components to install. Follow the instructions on  
the window.  
2
SCX-470x Series does not support the Wireless Setting and Installation  
menu.  
Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License  
Agreement. Then, click Next.  
4
The program searches for the machine.  
141  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
     
Installing driver over the network  
If your machine is not found on the network or locally, an error message  
Following command-line are effective and operated when command is  
appears. Select the option you want and click Next.  
used with /s or /S. But /h, /H or /? are exceptional commands that can be  
operated solely.  
The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you  
wish to use and click OK.  
5
Command- line  
/s or  
/S  
Definition  
Description  
Starts silent installation.  
Installs machine drivers  
without prompting any UIs or  
user intervention.  
If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window appears.  
Follow the instructions in the installation window.  
/p”<port name>” or Specifies printer port.  
/P”<port name>”  
Printer port name can be  
specified as IP address,  
hostname, USB local port  
name or IEEE1284 port name.  
6
Network Port will be  
Silent installation Mode  
created by use of  
Standard TCP/IP  
Port monitor. For  
local port, this port  
must exist on  
system before  
being specified by  
command.  
For example:  
Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user  
intervention. Once you start the installation, the machine driver and software  
are automatically installed on you computer. You can start the silent installation  
by typing /s or /S in the command window.  
/p”xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” in  
where, “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”  
means IP address for  
network printer. /  
p”USB001”, /P”LPT1:”, /  
p”hostname”  
Command-line Parameters  
Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window.  
142  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Installing driver over the network  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
/a”<dest_path>” or Specifies destination path  
Since machine drivers should  
be installed on the OS specific  
location, this command  
applies to only application  
software.  
/n”<Printer name>” Specifies printer name.  
With this parameter, you can  
add printer instances as your  
for installation.  
or  
Printer instance shall be  
/A”<dest_path>”  
created as specified printer wishes.  
name.  
/N”<Printer name>”  
The destination  
path should be a  
fully qualified path.  
/nd or  
/ND  
Commands not to set the  
installed driver as a default driver will not be the default  
machine driver.  
It indicates installed machine  
machine driver on your  
system if there are one or  
more printer drivers installed.  
If there is no installed  
machine driver on your  
system, then this option  
won’t be applied because  
Windows OS will set installed  
printer driver as a default  
machine driver.  
/i”<scriptfilename>” Specifies customized install Customized script file can be  
or  
script file for custom  
operation.  
assigned for customized  
silent installation. This script  
file can be created or  
modified through provided  
installer customizing utility or  
by text editor.  
/I”<script filename>”  
The script filename  
should be a fully  
qualified filename.  
/x or  
/X  
Uses existing machine  
driver files to create printer way to install a printer  
instance if it is already  
installed.  
This command provides a  
This customized  
script file is prior than  
default installer  
instance that uses installed  
printer driver files without  
installing an additional driver.  
setting in setup  
package but not prior  
than command-line  
parameters.  
143  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Installing driver over the network  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
Command- line  
Definition  
Description  
/up”<printer  
name>” or  
Removes only specified  
printer instance and not the way to remove only specified  
This command provides a  
/h, /H or /?  
Shows Command-line Usage.  
driver files.  
printer instance from your  
system without effecting  
other printer drivers. It will  
not remove printer driver files  
from your system.  
/UP”<printer  
name>”  
7
Macintosh  
/d or  
/D  
Uninstalls all device drivers This command will remove all  
and applications from your installed device drivers and  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered  
on.  
1
system.  
application software from  
your system.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
Click Continue.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
/v”<share name>” or Shares installed machine  
It will install all supported  
Windows OS platform’s  
and add other available  
/V”<share name>”  
platform drivers for Point & machine drivers to system  
Print.  
and share it with specified  
<share name> for point and  
print.  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
/o or  
/O  
Opens Printers and Faxes This command will open  
folder after installation.  
Printers and Faxes folder  
after the silent installation.  
/f”<log filename>”  
or  
Specifies log filename.  
It will create a log file to a  
specified folder.  
When the message which warns that all applications will close on your  
computer appears, click Continue.  
The default log file is  
/F”<log filename>”  
created in the system temp  
folder if not specified.  
Click Continue on the User Options Pane.  
9
144  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Installing driver over the network  
If you have not set the IP address yet, click Set IP address and refer to "IPv4  
When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance  
may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option.  
Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.  
18  
19  
Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be  
installed.  
10  
Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine  
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue  
first.  
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.  
Enter the password and click OK.  
11  
12  
For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung  
in Print Using and your machine name in Model.  
20  
21  
Installing software requires you to restart your computer. Click Continue  
Installation.  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, if Auto Select does not work properly, choose  
Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using.  
After the installation is finished, click Restart.  
13  
14  
Click Add.  
Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.  
Your machine appears in the Printer List, and is set as the default  
machine.  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, open the Applications folder > System  
Preferences and click Print & Fax.  
To install the fax driver:  
Click Add on the Printer List.  
15  
a Open the Applications folder > Samsung > Fax Queue Creator.  
b Your machine appears on the Printer List.  
c Select machine to use and Click Create button.  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click the “+” icon. A display window will pop  
up.  
For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.  
16  
17  
For Mac OS X 10.5-10.7, click IP.  
Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.  
145  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Installing driver over the network  
8
Select network printer and click Search button.  
7
8
Linux  
The machine’s IP address and model name appears on list field.  
Select your machine and click Next.  
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to  
Support or Downloads).  
9
Input the printer description and Next.  
10  
11  
12  
After the machine is added, click Finish.  
When installation is done, click Finish.  
To install other software:  
Add a network printer  
Install the Linux driver and add network printer  
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.  
1
Click Add Printer.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered  
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.  
2
1
The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.  
3
Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website.  
2
Select Network printer and click the Search button.  
4
Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new directory.  
3
The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.  
5
Double-click the Linux folder > install.sh icon.  
4
Select your machine and click Next.  
6
The Samsung installer window opens. Click Continue.  
5
Enter the printer description and click Next.  
7
The add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.  
6
After the machine is added, click Finish.  
8
146  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Installing driver over the network  
9
See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details.  
UNIX  
Unpack the UNIX printer driver package.  
4
Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before  
For example, on IBM AIX, use the following commands.  
gzip -d < enter the package name | tar xf -”  
The commands are marked with “”, when typing the commands, do not  
type “”.  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
Go to the unpacked directory.  
5
6
Run the install script.  
./install”  
To use the UNIX printer driver, you have to install the UNIX printer driver  
package first, then setup the printer. You can download the UNIX printer driver  
package from the Samsung website ((http://www.samsung.com > find your  
product > Support or Downloads).  
install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the  
UNIX Printer Driver package.  
Use “chmod 755 install” command to give the permission to the  
installer script.  
Installing the UNIX printer driver package  
Execute the “. /install –c” command to verify installation results.  
7
8
The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned.  
Run “installprinter” from the command line. This will bring up the Add  
Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this window referring to  
the following procedures.  
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the UNIX Printer  
Driver package to your computer.  
1
Acquire root privileges.  
2
su -”  
Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer.  
3
147  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Installing driver over the network  
Setting up the printer  
On some UNIX OS, for example on Solaris 10, just added printers may not be  
enabled and/or may not accept jobs. In this case run the following two  
commands on the root terminal:  
To add the printer to your UNIX system, run ‘installprinter’ from the command  
line. This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window. Setup the printer in this  
window according to the following steps:  
accept <printer_name>”  
enable <printer_name>”  
Type the name of the printer.  
1
Select the appropriate printer model from the model list.  
2
Uninstalling the printer driver package  
Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the  
Type field. This is optional.  
3
The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system.  
a Run “uninstallprinter” command from the terminal.  
It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard.  
The installed printers are listed in the drop-down list.  
b Select the printer to be deleted.  
c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system.  
d Execute the “. /install –d” command to uninstall the whole package.  
e To verify removal results, execute the “. /install –c” command.  
Specify any printer description in the Description field. This is optional.  
4
Specify the printer location in the Location field.  
5
Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for  
network-connected printers. On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type,  
only the DNS name is possible-numeric IP address is not allowed.  
6
Queue type shows the connection as lpd or jetdirect in the  
corresponding list box. Additionally, usb type is available on Sun Solaris  
7
To re-install it, use the command “. /install” to reinstall the binaries.  
OS.  
Select Copies to set the number of copies.  
8
Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted.  
9
Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order.  
10  
148  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Installing driver over the network  
Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default.  
11  
Click OK to add the printer.  
12  
149  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
IPv6 configuration  
The Add Printer Wizard window appears. Follow the instructions in the  
window.  
7
IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.  
If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6.  
Refer to the next section followed by.  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting  
to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.  
Activating IPv6  
Press the  
(Menu) button on the control panel.  
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6  
address.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > IPv6 Activate.  
Select On and press OK.  
10  
From the control panel  
Turn the machine off and turn it on again.  
Reinstall your printer driver.  
Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.  
1
Turn on the machine.  
2
Print a Network Configuration Report that will check IPv6 addresses  
3
Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes.  
4
Click Add a printer in the left pane of the Printers and Faxes windows.  
5
Click Add a local printer in the Add Printer windows.  
6
150  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
IPv6 configuration  
11  
Setting IPv6 addresses  
From the SyncThru™ Web Service  
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and  
managements.  
For models that do not have the display screen on the control panel, you  
need to access SyncThru™ Web Service first using the IPv4 address and  
follow the below procedure to use IPv6.  
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with  
FE80).  
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network  
router.  
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter  
the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and  
press the Enter key or click Go.  
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.  
1
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.  
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service you need to  
log-in as an administrator. Type in the below default ID and password.  
DHCPv6 address configuration (Stateful)  
2
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following  
options for default dynamic host configuration.  
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
Press the  
(Menu) button on the control panel.  
1
2
3
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, move the mouse  
cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network  
Settings.  
3
Press Network > TCP/IP (IPv6) > DHCPv6 Config.  
Press OK to select the required value you want.  
Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website.  
DHCPv6 Addr.: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.  
DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.  
Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.  
4
5
6
Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6.  
Check the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text  
box is activated.  
151  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
IPv6 configuration  
Enter the rest of the address (e.g.,:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the  
hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F).  
7
Choose the DHCPv6 configuration.  
8
Click the Apply button.  
9
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, that supports IPv6  
addressing as a URL.  
1
Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless  
2
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network  
Enter the IPv6 addresses (e.g.,: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).  
3
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.  
152  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
Wireless network name and network key  
Make sure your machine supports a wireless network. Wireless network  
may not be available depending on the model. (see "Features by models"  
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up,  
a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Key are created  
for the network. Locate this information before proceeding with the machine  
installation.  
This features available for SCX-472xW Series only.  
12  
13  
Getting started  
Choosing the installation type  
Understanding your network type  
You can install a wireless network from the machine’s control panel or the  
computer.  
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the  
machine at a time.  
From the control panel  
Infrastructure mode  
You can configure wireless parameters with the control panel.  
This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs  
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to  
communicate with the wireless machine.  
Ad hoc mode  
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless  
computer and wireless machine communicates directly.  
153  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
             
Wireless network setup  
From the computer  
If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode, make  
sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine. Using the  
WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN from the computer to connect to the  
access point (or wireless router) varies depending on the access point (or  
wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide of the access point  
(or wireless router) you are using.  
From the computer, we recommend using a USB cable with the program  
provided in the supplied software CD  
With a USB cable: You can simply set up a wireless network using the  
program on the supplied software CD. Only Windows and Macintosh  
Items to prepare  
Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup™ (WPS).  
Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).  
Networked computer (PIN mode only)  
You can also install a wireless network in Printer Settings Utility with a USB  
cable after installing the driver (Windows and Macintosh operating systems  
are supported).  
Choosing your type  
With a network cable: You can set up a wireless network using the  
There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network  
using the  
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your  
machine to a wireless network by pressing both the (WPS) button on the  
(WPS) button on the control panel.  
14  
Using the WPS button  
control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup™ (WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively.  
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected  
Setup™ (WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by  
pressing the  
(WPS) button on the control panel without a computer.  
154  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wireless network setup  
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your  
machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-  
Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router).  
c
AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process,  
the AP’s SSID information appears on the display.  
Connecting in PIN mode  
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a  
typical wireless network environment.  
Press and hold the  
2 seconds.  
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than  
1
2
To change the WPS mode, press  
WPS Setting.  
(Menu) > Network > Wireless > OK >  
The eight-digit PIN appears on the display.  
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes to the  
computer which is connected to the access point (or wireless router).  
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:  
Machines with an display screen  
a
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network.  
b
Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the  
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.  
Connecting in PBC mode  
c
AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection process,  
the AP’s SSID information is diplayed on the LCD display.  
Press and hold the  
2 seconds.  
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than  
1
The machine starts waiting for up to two minutes until you press the WPS  
(PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).  
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).  
2
The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below:  
a
Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or  
wireless router).  
b
Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the  
wireless network, the WPS LED light stays on.  
155  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wireless network setup  
You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the  
computer that is connected to the access point (or wireless router).  
Machines without an display screen  
3
The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-  
digit PIN.  
Connecting in PBC mode  
The WPS LED blinks in the order below:  
Press and hold the  
seconds until the status LED blinks quickly.  
(WPS) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4  
1
2
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to  
the access point (or wireless router).  
The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks  
slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the  
access point (or wireless router).  
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless  
network, the WPS LED light stays on.  
Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).  
Re-connecting to a network  
a
The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to  
the access point (or wireless router).  
When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect  
to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless  
connection settings and address.  
b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless  
network, the WPS LED light stays on.  
Connecting in PIN mode  
In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the  
wireless network:  
The network configuration report, including PIN, must be printed.  
1
The machine is turned off and on again.  
In ready mode, press and hold the  
the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN  
number.  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) button on  
The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.  
Press and hold the  
4 seconds until the status LED stays on.  
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than  
2
The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router).  
156  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wireless network setup  
Canceling the connection process  
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a  
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over the  
To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to  
the wireless network, press and release the  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) button  
on the control panel. You need to wait 2 minuites to re-connect to the  
wireless network.  
Select  
(Menu) > Network > OK > Wireless > OK > WLAN Settings  
1
2
> OK on the control panel.  
Disconnecting from a network  
Press the OK to select the setup method you want.  
Wizard: The wireless network interface card in your machine  
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the  
the control panel for more than two seconds.  
(WPS) button on  
searches for wireless networks in the area and shows the results.  
Custom: You can configure the according to your needs.  
When the Wi-Fi network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately  
disconnected from the wireless network, and the WPS LED is off.  
Wizard mode  
When the Wi-Fi network is being used: While the machine waits until the  
current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the WPS LED. Then, the  
wireless network connection is automatically disconnected. The WPS LED is  
The wireless network interface card on your machine searches for  
1
2
wireless networks in the area and shows the results.  
off.  
Press Search List > OK > select the network > OK.  
15  
You can select a network using SSID.  
Using the menu button  
Press WLAN Security > OK > None > OK.  
3
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless  
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when  
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your  
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.  
If you see another message, go to the next step.  
157  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
According to the network you selected, the WLAN security encryption  
type will be WEP or WPA.  
Press OK to select the method of Operation Mode.  
4
3
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each  
In case of WEP, press the Open System or SharedKey.  
other in a peer-to-peer environment. Go to step 4.  
-
-
Open System: Authentication is not used, and Encryption  
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data  
security. Enter the WEP Key after selecting Open System.  
Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with each  
other through an access point. Go to step 5.  
Press OK to select the method of Channel.  
SharedKey: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper  
WEP Key can access the network. Enter the WEP Key after  
selecting SharedKey.  
4
5
If you select Auto, the wireless network interface card on your machine  
will automatically adjust the channels.  
In case of WPA, enter the WPA Key. The key length should be  
between 8 and 63 characters long.  
Press OK to select the method of WLAN Security.  
None: This is used when the validation of a wireless device’s identity  
and data encryption are not required for your network. Open system  
is used for IEEE 802.11 authentication.  
Press OK.  
5
Static WEP: This uses the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) algorithm  
suggested by IEEE 802.11 standard for security. Static WEP security  
mode requires a proper WEP key for data encryption, decryption,  
and IEEE 802.11 authentication. Press OK to select the setup method  
in Authentication  
Custom mode  
Enter the SSID when Edit SSID appears on the top line of the display, the  
name that identifies a wireless network. SSID is case-sensitive so you  
need to enter it carefully. Press OK.  
1
2
-
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may  
or may not be used, depending on the need for data security.  
Enter the WEP Key.  
Select the type of wireless connections.  
-
SharedKey: Authentication is used. Enter the WEP Key after  
selecting SharedKey.  
158  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK: You can select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK to  
authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This  
uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre-Shared Key  
passphrase), which is manually configured on the access point and  
each of its clients.  
Access point via USB cable  
Items to prepare  
Access point  
a
Press OK when WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK appears of on the  
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
display.  
b Press OK to select TKIP or AES in Encryption. If you select  
WPA2-PSK, press OK to select AES or TKIP + AES in Encryption.  
c
Enter the WPA Key.  
Press OK.  
6
Creating the infrastructure network  
Disconnect the network cable (standard or crossover). Your machine should  
then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc  
mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
1
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.  
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3
16  
Click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.  
Setup using Windows  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your  
CD-ROM drive and click OK.  
Shortcut to Wireless Setting program without CD: If you have installed the  
printer driver once, you can access the Wireless Setting program without  
CD. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung  
Printers > your printer driver name > Wireless Setting Program.  
159  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wireless network setup  
Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.  
4
If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is properly connected  
between the computer and machine, and follow the instructions on the  
window.  
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select  
the name (SSID) of the access point you are using and click Next.  
7
If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you want to  
set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.  
Install Now: If you have already set up the wireless network, click  
this button to install the machine’s driver to use the wireless network  
machine. If you have not set up the wireless network, click the  
Wireless Setting and Installation button to set up the wireless  
network before you click this button.  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of access point you  
want (SSID is case-sensitive).  
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless network  
settings of your machine with a USB cable then install the machine  
driver. This is only for users who have not set up the wireless  
connection before.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may  
not be used, depending on the need for data security.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key  
can access the network.  
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the  
print server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key  
(generally called Pre- Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually  
configured on the access point and each of its clients.  
Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the  
License Agreement. Then, click Next.  
5
6
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,  
TKIP AES).  
The software searches the wireless network.  
Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.  
160  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value.  
The window shows the wireless network settings and checks if the  
settings are correct. Click Next.  
8
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate  
WEP Key Index.  
For the DHCP method  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown  
in the window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the  
assignment method to DHCP.  
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has  
security settings.  
For the Static method  
The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ  
according to its security mode: WEP, or WPA.  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown  
in the window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP  
address and other network configuration values for the machine.  
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the  
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer is  
set to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to get the  
static IP address.  
WEP  
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter the  
WEP security key. Click Next.  
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing  
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data  
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit  
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.  
For example:  
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:  
WPA  
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.  
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes  
automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key  
Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data  
encryption.  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as follows:  
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)  
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB  
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.  
9
161  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears.  
Ad hoc via USB cable  
10  
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup  
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine  
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by  
following the simple steps below.  
procedure.  
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.  
Then, click Next.  
Items to prepare  
Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears.  
11  
Network-connected computer  
Select the components to be installed. Click Next.  
12  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name,  
set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the  
default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click Next.  
13  
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page  
appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.  
14  
Creating the ad hoc network in Windows  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 16.  
1
Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.  
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
2
15  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3
Click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.  
To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from  
16  
Samsung, click On-line Registration.  
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your  
CD-ROM drive and click OK.  
Click Finish.  
17  
162  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.  
4
If the software has failed to search the network, check if the USB cable is  
connected properly between the computer and machine, and follow the  
instruction in the window.  
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your  
machine has searched appears.  
7
If you want to use the Samsung default ad hoc setting, select the last  
wireless network on the list, Network Name(SSID) is portthru and  
Signal is Printer Self Network.  
Install Now: If you have set the wireless network, click this button to  
install the machine’s driver to use the wireless network machine. If  
you have not set the wireless network, click Wireless Setting and  
Installation button to set the wireless network before you click this  
button.  
Then, click Next.  
If you want to use other ad hoc settings, select another wireless network  
from the list.  
Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless network  
settings of your machine’s with a USB cable then install the machine  
driver. This only for users who have not set up the wireless  
connection before.  
If you want to change ad hoc settings click the Advanced Setting button.  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID  
is case-sensitive).  
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.  
Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the  
License Agreement. Then, click Next.  
5
6
Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may  
not be used, depending on the need for data security.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key  
The software searches the wireless network.  
can access the network.  
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).  
Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.  
163  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value.  
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the  
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network  
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be  
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the  
wireless network setting should also be Static.  
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate  
WEP Key Index.  
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network  
has security setting.  
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open System or  
Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.  
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless  
network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the  
static IP address.  
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing  
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data  
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit  
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.  
For the DHCP method  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in  
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click  
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP  
address automatically (DHCP).  
The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the  
settings and click Next.  
8
For the Static method  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in  
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click  
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration  
values for the machine.  
For example:  
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:  
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:  
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)  
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
164  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB  
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.  
If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.  
9
14  
If not, click No to reprint it.  
To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from  
Samsung, click On-line Registration.  
If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow the steps in the  
window.  
15  
16  
Click Next if you are finished with the computer’s wireless network settings.  
Click Finish.  
If you set the computer’s wireless network on DHCP, it will take several  
minutes to receive the IP address.  
17  
Setup using Macintosh  
The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears.  
10  
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup  
Items to prepare  
procedure.  
Access point  
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.  
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
Then, click Next.  
Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears.  
11  
Select the components to be installed. Click Next.  
12  
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name,  
set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the  
default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click Next.  
Access point via USB cable  
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page  
appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.  
13  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
1
Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.  
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 15.  
2
165  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3
When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of the access point  
4
you want with (SSID is case-sensitive).  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.  
5
Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Double-click the Installer OS X icon.  
6
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may  
not be used, depending on the need for data security.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key  
can access the network.  
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the  
print server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key  
(generally called Pre- Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually  
configured on the access point and each of its clients.  
Click Continue.  
7
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
8
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
9
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your  
computer appears, click Continue.  
10  
Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES,  
TKIP, AES)  
Select the Wireless Network Setting.  
Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.  
11  
Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value.  
The software searches the wireless network.  
12  
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate  
WEP Key Index.  
If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is connected  
between the computer and machine properly, and follow the instructions in  
the window.  
After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select  
the name (SSID) of the access point you are using and click Next.  
13  
166  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
The wireless network security window appears when the access point has  
security setting.  
The window shows the wireless network settings and check if settings  
are right. Click Next.  
14  
The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ  
according to its security mode: WEP or WPA.  
For the DHCP method  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown  
in the window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the  
assignment method to DHCP.  
WEP  
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter the  
WEP security key. Click Next.  
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing  
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data  
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit  
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.  
For the Static method  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown  
in the window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP  
address and other network configuration values for the machine.  
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the  
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer is  
set to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to get the  
static IP address.  
WPA  
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.  
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes  
automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key  
Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data  
encryption.  
For example:  
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:  
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as follows:  
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)  
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.  
15  
167  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB  
cable between the computer and machine.  
Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.  
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder > Installer OS X icon.  
Click Continue.  
16  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After  
the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart.  
17  
Read the license agreement and click Continue.  
Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.  
Ad hoc via USB cable  
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine  
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by  
following these simple directions.  
When the message that warns that all applications will close on your  
computer appears, click Continue.  
Click Wireless Network Setting and Installation.  
10  
11  
Items to prepare  
The software searches the wireless network devices.  
Network-connected computer  
Software CD that provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
USB cable  
If the search has failed, check if the USB cable is connected between the  
computer and machine properly, and follow the instructions in the window.  
Creating the ad hoc network in Macintosh  
Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.  
1
Turn on your computer and machine.  
2
Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.  
3
168  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your  
machine has searched appears.  
12  
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network  
has security setting.  
If you want to use the Samsung default ad hoc setting, select the last  
wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is portthru  
and Signal is Printer Self Network.  
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open System or  
Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.  
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing  
unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data  
portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit  
or 128-bit WEP encryption key.  
Then, click Next.  
If you want to use other ad hoc settings, select another wireless network  
from the list.  
If you want to change ad hoc settings click the Advanced Setting button.  
The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the  
settings and click Next.  
13  
Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID  
is case-sensitive).  
Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.  
Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).  
Authentication: Select an authentication type.  
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may  
not be used, depending on the need for data security.  
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key  
can access the network.  
Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).  
Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.  
Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value.  
WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate  
WEP Key Index.  
169  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.  
14  
15  
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the  
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network  
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be  
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the  
wireless network setting should also be Static.  
When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB  
cable between the computer and machine.  
Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After  
the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart.  
16  
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network  
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP  
address.  
18  
For the DHCP method  
Using a network cable  
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in  
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click  
Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP  
address automatically (DHCP).  
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to  
work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration  
procedures.  
For the Static method  
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in  
the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click  
Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration  
values for the machine.  
After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a  
machine driver to print from an application (see "Installing driver over  
For example:  
See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless  
network, for information about your network configuration.  
If the computer’s network information is as shown follows:  
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:  
Items to prepare  
-
-
-
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)  
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
Access point  
Network-connected computer  
170  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
   
Wireless network setup  
Software CD that was provided with your machine  
The machine installed with a wireless network interface  
Network cable  
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection  
status.  
Printing a network configuration report  
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network  
configuration report.  
Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If  
not, connect the machine with a standard network cable.  
1
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter  
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.  
2
For example,  
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)  
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine  
using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is  
the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the  
Network Configuration Report.  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.  
3
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
4
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
Configuring the machine’s wireless network  
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network  
Settings.  
5
6
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless  
network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when  
the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your  
wireless environment, please ask the person who set up your network.  
Click Wireless > Wizard.  
171  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
 
Wireless network setup  
The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If  
the setup is right, click Apply.  
9
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if  
you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom.  
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should  
then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc  
mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously.  
Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.  
7
SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless  
network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect  
to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is  
case-sensitive.  
19  
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off  
Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless  
153).  
You can also turn on/off the Wi-Fi from the machine’s control panel using  
the Network menu.  
-
Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with  
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.  
-
Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with  
each other through an access point.  
Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,  
connect the machine with a standard network cable.  
1
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the  
access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID.  
Note that “portthru” is the default SSID of your machine.  
Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter  
your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.  
2
For example,  
Click Next.  
8
If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.  
3
password (network key) and click Next.  
172  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
Connecting Failure - Not Found SSID  
4
ID: admin  
The machine is unable to search the network name (SSID) you have selected  
or entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try  
connecting again.  
Password: sec00000  
When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network  
Settings.  
Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.  
5
6
Click Wireless > Custom.  
You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.  
20  
Troubleshooting  
Problems during setup or driver installation  
Printers Not Found  
Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the  
machine.  
USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect  
machine to your computer using the USB cable.  
The machine does not support a wireless network. Check the machine's  
user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and  
prepare a wireless network machine.  
173  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security  
Then, the machine’s network information should be as below:  
You configured security incorrectly. Check the configured security on your  
access point and machine.  
IP address: 169.254.133.43  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)  
Gateway: 169.254.133.1  
Connecting Failure - General Connection Error  
Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB  
cable and your machine’s power.  
Other problems  
Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network  
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:  
Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired  
network cable from your machine.  
For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own  
user's guide.  
PC Connection Error  
The configured network address is unable to connect between your  
computer and machine.  
Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be  
turned on.  
-
-
For a DHCP network environment  
Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from  
the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the  
signal.  
The receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when computer is  
configured to DHCP.  
For a Static network environment  
Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and  
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network  
communication.  
The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured  
to static address.  
For example:  
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:  
IP address: 169.254.133.42  
174  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
Wireless network setup  
Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the  
communication.  
The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless  
signal.  
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it  
cannot be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the  
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and  
try searching for the machine again.  
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless  
router) and the machine.  
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not  
separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.  
Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can  
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.  
The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may  
interfere with the wireless signal.  
Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured  
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless  
router) administrator.  
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave  
oven and some Bluetooth devices.  
Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the  
settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the  
characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the  
machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset.  
Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the  
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a  
user's information before connecting to access point (or wireless router).  
This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless  
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.  
When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista,  
you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use  
the wireless machine.  
You cannot use Infrastructure mode and Ad hoc mode at the same time for  
Samsung wireless network machines.  
The machine is within the range of the wireless network.  
175  
2. Using a Network-Connected Machine  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for advanced  
machine setup.  
 
Before you begin reading a chapter  
This chapter explains all the features available for this series' models to help users easily understand the features.  
You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide (see "Menu overview" on page 31).  
The following are tips for using this chapter  
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
(Menu).  
For models that do not have the  
Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models.  
177  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
Print menu  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(Menu) > Print Setup on the control panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Print Setup on the touch screen.  
Item  
Description  
Selects the direction in which information is printed on a  
page.  
Orientation  
You can enter the number of copies using the number  
keypad.  
Copies  
Specifies the number of dots printed per inch (dpi). The  
higher the setting, the sharper printed characters and  
graphics.  
Resolution  
Lightens or darkens the print on the page. The Normal  
setting usually produces the best result. Use the Light  
toner density setting to save toner.  
Darkness  
Darken Text  
Emulation  
Prints text darker than on a normal document.  
Sets the emulation type and option.  
178  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
Copy menu  
1
Item  
Description  
Copy feature  
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image (see  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Reduce/Enlarge  
If the machine is set Eco mode, reduce and  
enlarge features are not available.  
To change the menu options:  
Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is  
easier to read, when the original contains faint  
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 61)  
Darkness  
Contrast  
Press  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Feature on the control panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Copy Default on the  
Adjusts the contrast level to scan an original that is  
easier to read, when the original contains too faint or  
too dark contents (see "Contrast" on page 62)  
touch screen.  
Or press Copy > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.  
Improves the copy quality by selecting the document  
Original Type  
Original Orientation  
Layout  
Item  
Scan Size  
Original Size  
Description  
Sets the original image’s orientation.  
Sets the image size.  
Adjusts the layout format such as poster, clone, ID copy,  
2/4-up, booklet, etc.  
You can enter the number of copies using the number  
keypad.  
Copies  
179  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
       
Copy menu  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Copy Collation  
Collate Copy  
Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you  
make 2 copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page  
document will print followed by a second complete  
document.  
2-up or 4-up  
Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4  
pages onto one sheet of paper.  
N-up Copy  
1
2
On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of  
3
4
originals.  
This copy feature is available only when you  
load originals into the document feeder.  
Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual  
pages.  
180  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
Copy menu  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9  
(Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the  
purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one  
poster-size document.  
Prints multiple original images on a single page. The  
number of images is automatically determined by the  
original image and the paper size.  
Clone Copy  
This copy feature is available only when you  
place originals on the scanner glass.  
You cannot adjust the copy size using  
Reduce/Enlarge for the Clone Copy  
feature.  
Poster Copy  
This copy feature is available only when you  
place originals on the scanner glass.  
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each  
portion is scanned and printed one by one in  
the following order:  
181  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
Copy menu  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire  
book. If the book is too thick, lift the cover until its  
hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the  
cover. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,  
start copying with the cover open.  
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides  
of the paper, which are then folded to produce a  
booklet with all of the pages in the correct sequence.  
The machine will reduce and correctly adjust the  
position of each image to fit on the selected paper.  
Booklet  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Book Copy  
Prints an image without its background. This copy  
feature removes the background color and can be  
helpful when copying an original containing color in  
the background, such as a newspaper or a catalog.  
Left Page: Use this option to print left page of the  
book.  
Right Page: Use this option to print right page of the  
book.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Both Page: Use this option to print both pages of  
the book.  
Adjust Bkgd  
Auto: Optimizes the background.  
Enhance Lev.1~2: The higher the number is, the  
more vivid the background is.  
This copy feature is available only when you  
place originals on the scanner glass.  
Erase Lev.1~4: The higher the number is, the lighter  
the background is.  
182  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
Copy menu  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Allows you to create a binding edge for the document.  
The image can be adjusted up or down on the page  
and/or shifted to the right or left.  
Allows you to erase spots, drill holes, fold creases and  
staple marks along any of the four edges of a document.  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Margin Shift copying  
Small Original: rases the edge of the original if it is  
small. This feature is available only when you place  
originals on the scanner glass.  
Edge Erase copying  
Off: Does not use this feature.  
Auto Center: Automatically copy in the center of the  
paper. This feature is available only when you place  
originals on the scanner glass.  
Hole Punch: Erases the marks of bookbinding holes.  
Book Center: Erases the middle part of the paper  
which is black and horizontal, when you copy a  
book. This feature is available only when you place  
originals on the scanner glass.  
Custom Margin: Enter the left, right, top, bottom  
margin using Number keypad.  
Border Erase: Enter the left, right, top, bottom  
margin using Number keypad.  
Gray Enhance  
copying  
When you make a copy in gray scale, use this feature to  
get better quality of copy-output.  
183  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
Copy menu  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
The watermark option allows you to print text over an  
existing document. For example, you use it when you  
want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or  
“CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first  
page or all pages of a document.  
2->1Side  
Watermark copying  
2->2Side  
Duplex (continue)  
2->1Side ROT2  
You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of  
paper.  
Off: Prints in normal mode.  
1->2Side Short  
2
Duplex  
3
5
1->2Side Long  
184  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
Copy menu  
2
Copy Setup  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(copy) >  
(Menu) > Copy Setup on the control panel.  
Item  
Description  
Resets the value or setting to the printer’s out-of-box  
state.  
Change Default  
185  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
Fax menu  
3
Item  
Description  
Fax Feature  
Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is  
easier to read, when the original contains faint  
Darkness  
markings and dark images (see "Darkness" on page 61).  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview"  
The default document settings procedure good results  
when using typical text-based originals. However, if you  
send originals that are of poor quality, or contain  
photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce  
Resolution  
Duplex  
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on  
prints the received fax on both sides of paper.  
To change the menu options:  
Sends a fax to multiple destinations (see "Sending a fax  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu)> Fax Feature on the control panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Fax Default on the  
touch screen.  
Multi Send  
Delay Send  
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
Or press Fax > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.  
Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you  
Item  
Scan Size  
Original Size  
Description  
Sets the image size.  
You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
Adjusts the contrast level to scan an original that is  
easier to read, when the original contains too faint or  
too dark contents.  
Contrast  
186  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
       
Fax menu  
4
Item  
Description  
Sending setup  
Scans the original into memory and immediately  
transmits it when the current operation is finished.  
Priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple  
destinations between stations (example, when the  
transmission to station A ends, before transmission to  
station B begins) or between redial attempts (see  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Priority Send  
To change the menu options:  
Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination  
by a fax or PC. If you are out of office but have to receive  
the fax, this feature may be useful.  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Sending on the control panel.  
Forward  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Fax Default on the  
touch screen.  
Item  
Redial Times  
Redial Term  
Description  
Stores the received fax in memory without printing out.  
To print received documents, you need to enter the  
password. You can prevent your received faxes from  
being accessed by unauthorized people (see "Receiving  
Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the  
machine will not redial.  
Secure Receive  
Sets the time interval before automatic redialling.  
Adds additional documents to a reserved delay fax job  
Sets a prefix of up to five digits. This number dials  
before any automatic dial number is started. It is useful  
for accessing a PABX exchange.  
Add Page  
Prefix Dial  
ECM Mode  
Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory  
Sends faxes using error correction mode (ECM) to  
makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any  
error. It may take more time.  
Cancel Job  
187  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
Fax menu  
To change the menu options:  
Item  
Description  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving on the control panel.  
Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax  
transmission was successfully completed or not. If you  
select On-Error, the machine prints a report only when  
a transmission is not successful.  
Send Report  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Fax Default on the  
touch screen.  
Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of  
the first page of the fax sent.  
Image TCR  
Dial Mode  
Item  
Description  
Receive Mode  
Selects the default fax receiving mode.  
Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse. This  
setting may not be available depending on your  
country.  
Specifies the number of times the machine rings before  
answering an incoming call.  
Ring To Answer  
Sends faxes at a preset toll-saving time to save on call  
costs. This setting may not be available depending on  
your country.  
Automatically prints the page number, and the date  
and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a  
received fax.  
Toll Save  
Stamp RCV Name  
Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax options  
such as machine ID, fax number, etc.  
Initiates fax reception from an extension phone  
plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the  
machine. If you pick up the extension phone and hear  
fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to *9* at the  
factory.  
Setup Wizard  
Rcv Start Code  
5
Receiving setup  
Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the  
size of the paper loaded in the machine.  
Auto Reduction  
Discard Size  
Discards a specific length from the end of the received  
fax.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Blocks any unwanted faxes that you stored in the  
memory as junk fax numbers. This setting may not be  
available depending on your country.  
Junk Fax Setup  
188  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
Fax menu  
Item  
Description  
Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer  
several different telephone numbers. You can set the  
machine to recognize different ring patterns for each  
number. This setting may not be available depending  
on your country (see "Receiving faxes using DRPD  
DRPD Mode  
Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper.  
You can save the paper usage.  
Duplex Print  
Doc Box Saving  
Stores received faxes in the common box. This menu  
only appears when an optional mass storage device  
(HDD) drive has been installed (see "Variety feature" on  
Document Box  
Saving  
189  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
Scan menu  
6
Item  
Description  
Scan feature  
SMB Default  
SMB  
Sets scan destination to an SMB server. You scan the  
originals and send the scanned image to an SMB server  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Prints a confirmation report showing whether the  
scanned image sending was successful.  
Send Report  
Local PC  
Sets scan destination to a usb-connected computer.  
You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a  
directory such as My Documents (see "Basic Scanning"  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(scan) >  
(Menu) > Scan Feature on the control panel.  
Sets scan destination to a network-connected  
computer. You scan the originals and save the scanned  
image to a directory such as My Documents (see  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Scan Default on the  
touch screen.  
Network PC  
Or press Scan > select the menu item you want on the touch screen.  
Sets scan destination to a Document Box. You scan the  
originals and send the scanned image to the storage  
which called Document Box in the machine.  
Item  
Description  
Document Box  
Shared Boxes  
USB Default  
USB  
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals  
and save the scanned image to a USB device.  
Sets scan destination to a shared folder. You can create  
and use the shared folder (see "Using shared folder  
Email Default  
Send Email  
Sets scan destination to an email. You scan the originals  
and email the scanned image to destinations (see  
Custom Email  
FTP Default  
FTP  
Sets scan destination to an FTP server. You scan the  
originals and send the scanned image to an FTP server  
190  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
Scan menu  
7
Item  
Description  
Scan setup  
Adjust the contrast level to scan lighter or darker than  
the original.  
Contrast  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(scan) >  
(Menu) > Scan Setup on the control panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Default Setting > Scan Default on the  
touch screen.  
Item  
Scan Size  
Original Size  
Description  
Sets the image size.  
Original Type  
Resolution  
Sets the original document’s type.  
Sets the image resolution.  
Sets the color mode.  
Color Mode  
Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If  
you select BMP, JPEG, TIFF, or PDF, you can select to  
scan multiple pages.  
File Format  
Darkness  
Adjusts the brightness level to scan.  
191  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
System setup  
8
Item  
Description  
Machine setup  
Form overlay is images stored on the printer’s mass  
storage device (HDD) as a special file format that can be  
printed in layers on any document.  
Select Form  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
When On, stores documents on the mass storage device  
(HDD) for network printing.  
HDD Spooling  
Language  
Sets the language of the text that appears on the control  
panel display.  
To change the menu options:  
Sets the machine’s default mode among fax mode, copy  
mode, or scan mode.  
Default Mode  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Machine Setup on the control panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Initial Setup on the touch screen.  
Default Paper Size  
You can set the default paper size to use.  
Sets how long the machine waits before going to power  
save mode.  
Item  
Machine ID  
Description  
PowerSave  
Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of  
each fax page that you send.  
When the machine does not receive data for an extended  
period of time, power consumption is automatically  
lowered.  
Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of  
each fax page that you send.  
Fax Number  
Date & Time  
Clock Mode  
Sets how long the machine’s scanner part waits before  
going to power save mode.  
Sets the date and time.  
Scan PWR Save  
System Timeout  
When the scanner does not receive data for an extended  
period of time, power consumption is automatically  
lowered.  
Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr. and  
24 hr.  
Off: Prints in normal mode.  
Sets the time that the machine remembers previously  
used copy settings. After the timeout, the machine  
restores the default copy settings.  
Single Form: Prints all page using the first form.  
Form Menu  
Double Form: Prints the front page using the first  
form and the back page using the second form.  
192  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
     
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Auto CR  
Description  
Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing  
the last page of a print job that does not end with a  
command to print the page.  
Allows you to append the required carriage return to  
each line feed, which is useful for Unix or DOS users.  
Job Timeout  
Firmware Version  
AutoComplete  
Shows the product’s firmware version.  
You can set the condition to wake up from power-save  
mode. Set the item on.  
Provides suggestions while you type an email address or  
fax number. This enables you to find and select the data  
without typing it in completely.  
Button Press: When you press any button except  
power button, the machine wake up from the power  
save mode.  
Tray Chaining  
Determine whether or not the machine continues  
printing when it detects the paper does not match. For  
example, if both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same  
size paper, the machine automatically prints from tray 2  
after the tray 1 runs out of paper.  
Wakeup Event  
Auto Tray Switch  
Scanner: When you insert paper in the document  
feeder, the machine wake up from the power save  
mode.  
Printer: When you open or close the scan unit, the  
machine wake up from the power save mode.  
This option does not appear if you selected Auto  
for Paper Source from printer driver.  
Determine whether or not the machine continues  
printing when it detects the paper does not match the  
paper settings.  
Off: If a paper mismatch occurs, the machine waits  
until you insert the correct paper.  
Automatically substitutes the printer driver’s paper size  
to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4.  
For example, if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set  
the paper size to Letter in the printer driver, the machine  
prints on A4 paper and vice versa.  
Auto Continue  
On: If a paper mismatch occurs, an error message will  
display. The machine waits for about 30 second, then  
automatically clear the message and continue  
printing.  
Paper Substitution  
Paper Mismatch  
Determine whether to disregard the paper mismatch  
error or not. Select Off, then the machine does not stop  
printing even if the paper mismatches.  
Altitude Adj.  
Optimize print quality according to the machine’s  
altitude.  
Altitude  
Adjustment  
193  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
The printer detects the printing data from computer  
whether a page is empty or not. You can set to print or  
skip the blank page.  
Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to the  
machine.  
Import Setting  
PrintBlankPage  
Multi-Bin  
Exports data stored on a USB memory stick to the  
machine.  
Export Setting  
Toner Save  
Mode: Selects the multi-bin mode you want to use.  
Default Bin: Selects the bin to use as a default.  
Activating this mode extends the life of your toner  
cartridge and reduces your cost per page beyond what  
one would experience in the normal mode, but it reduces  
print quality.  
Default Source  
Address Book  
Sets the tray to use as a default.  
Views or prints the phone book or email address list.  
Clean Drum: Cleans the OPC drum of the cartridge by  
printing a sheet.  
You can reduce the printing noise by turning this menu  
on. However, the printing speed and quality may be  
declined.  
Quiet Mode  
Clean Fuser: Cleans the fuser by printing a sheet.  
CLR Empty Msg.: This option appears only when  
toner cartridge is empty.  
Allows you to save print resources and enables eco-  
friendly printing.  
Supplies Info.: Allows you to check how many pages  
are printed and how much toner is left in the cartridge.  
Default Mode: Select whether to turn the Eco mode  
on or off.  
TonerLow Alert: If toner in the cartridge has run out,  
a message informing the user to change the toner  
cartridge appears. You can set the option for this  
message to appear or not.  
Maintenance  
Eco Settings  
On force (On-Forced): Sets the Eco mode on with  
password. If a user wants to turn the Eco mode  
on/off, the user needs to enter the password.  
Paper Stacking: If you use a machine in a humid area,  
or you are using the damp print media caused by a  
high humidity, the print-outs on the output tray may  
be curled and may not be stacked properly. In this  
case, you can set the machine to use this function to  
let print-outs stacked firmly. But, using this function  
will make the print speed slow.  
Select Template (Select Temp.): Selects the eco  
template set from the SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Clear Setting  
Restores the machine’s factory default settings.  
194  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
System setup  
9
10  
Paper setup  
Sound / Volume  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
To change the menu options:  
To change the menu options:  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Paper Setup on the control panel.  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Sound/Volume on the control panel.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Paper Setup on the touch screen.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Initial Setup > Sound/Volume on the  
touch screen.  
Item  
Paper Size  
Description  
Item  
Key Sound  
Description  
Sets the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes,  
according to your requirements.  
Turns the key sound on or off. With this option set to on,  
a tone sounds each time a key is pressed.  
Paper Type  
Paper Source  
Margin  
Chooses the type of the paper for each tray.  
Selects from which tray the paper is used.  
Sets the margins for the document.  
Turns the alarm sound on or off. With this option set to  
on, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax  
communication ends.  
Alarm Sound  
Activates the tray confirmation message. If you open and  
close a tray, a window asking you whether to set the  
paper size and type for the tray just opened appears.  
Tray Confirm  
195  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
System setup  
11  
Item  
Description  
Report  
Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line  
through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone.  
With this option set to Comm. which means the speaker  
is on until the remote machine answers.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook  
Dial. You can adjust the speaker volume only  
when the telephone line is connected.  
To change the menu options:  
Speaker  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Report on the control panel.  
a Press  
(fax) on the control panel.  
b Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Reports on the touch screen.  
the speaker.  
c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you  
Item  
Description  
want.  
d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and  
Prints the menu map which shows the layout and  
current settings of this machine.  
Menu Map  
All Reports  
return to ready mode.  
Prints all kinds of reports that this machine  
provides.  
Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can  
select off, low, middle, and high level.  
Ringer  
Prints a report on the machine's overall  
configuration.  
Configuration  
Supplies Info.  
Prints supplies’ information page.  
Supplies Information  
Prints all of the email addresses currently stored  
in the machine’s memory.  
Address Book  
196  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
User Auth  
Description  
Prints the demo page to check whether your  
machine is printing properly or not.  
Prints the authorized users who are allowed to  
use the email function.  
Demo Page  
Local User  
Authentication  
Prints a transmission report including the fax  
number, the number of pages, the elapsed time  
of the job, the communication mode, and the  
communication results for fax job. You can set up  
your machine to automatically print a  
transmission confirmation report after each fax  
job.  
PCL Font  
Prints the PCL font list.  
PS Font  
Prints the PS/PS3 font list.  
Fax Send  
PS3 Font  
EPSON Font  
KSC5843 Font  
KSC5895 Font  
KSSM Font  
Prints the EPSON font list.  
Prints the KS5843 font list.  
Prints the KS5895 font list.  
Prints the KSSM font list.  
Prints information on the faxes you have recently  
sent.  
Fax Sent  
Prints information on the faxes you have recently  
received.  
Fax Received  
Email Sent  
Net User Auth  
Prints the users and their IDs who logged in the  
domain.  
Prints information on the emails you have  
recently sent.  
Network User  
Authentication  
Scheduled Jobs  
Prints the document list currently stored for  
delayed faxes along with the starting time and  
type of each operation.  
Prints a usage page. The usage page contains the  
total number of pages printed.  
Usage Counter  
Fax Options  
Fax Scheduled Jobs  
Prints the information of a fax reports.  
Prints the fax numbers specified as junk fax  
numbers.  
JunkFax  
Stored Job List  
Stored Jobs  
Prints jobs currently stored in the optional  
memory or on a mass storage device (HDD).  
Network Conf.  
Network Configuration  
Prints information on your machine’s network  
connection and configuration.  
Completed Job  
Completed Jobs  
Prints list of completed jobs.  
197  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
System setup  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Accounting Report  
Accounting  
This is used only available when Job Accounting  
is enabled from the SyncThru™ Web Admin  
Service. You can print a report of printout counts  
for each user.  
Shows the supply life indicators (see "Monitoring the  
Supplies Life  
Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty  
TonerLow Alert  
Serial Number  
Serial No.  
Shows the machine’s serial number. When you call for  
service or register as a user on the Samsung website, you  
can find this.  
12  
Maintenance  
Enables the automatic linking feature for trays. when one  
tray is not available for paper empty or mismatch, this  
option allows your printer to feed paper from another  
available tray.  
Paper Stacking  
Color  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Allows you to adjust the color setting such as contrast  
level, color registration, color density, etc.  
To change the menu options:  
Sets some part of ram disk to the job storage area. Using  
manage" on page 199). This allows the data from your  
computer to be sent to the print queue of the ram disk.  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Maintenance on the control panel.  
Ram Disk  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Initial Setup on the touch screen.  
Item  
Description  
When toner cartridge is empty, this option appears. You  
can clear the empty message.  
CLR Empty Msg.  
You can set the machine to ignore the toner empty  
message and continue printing except incoming faxes.  
Ignore Toner  
198  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
System setup  
13  
Item  
Description  
Clear setting  
Scan Setup  
Restores all of the scan options to the factory  
default.  
Scan Default  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Restores all of the system options to the factory  
default.  
System Setup  
Network Setup  
Address Book  
Restores all of the network options to the factory  
default. (Reboot required.)  
To change the menu options:  
Clears all of the email address entries stored in  
memory.  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Clear Setting on the control panel.  
Fax Sent  
Clears all records of sent faxes.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Restore Options on the touch screen.  
Sent Report  
Email Sent  
Clears all records of sent emails.  
Clears all records of received faxes.  
Item  
All Setting  
Description  
Fax Received  
Clears all of the data stored in memory and resets  
all of your settings to the factory default.  
Fax RCV Report  
Rcvd Report  
Restores all of the printer options to the factory  
default.  
Printer Setup  
Paper Setup  
14  
Restores all of the paper options to the factory  
default.  
Job manage  
Fax Setup  
Restores all of the fax options to the factory  
default.  
Fax Default  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Copy Setup  
Restores all of the copy options to the factory  
default.  
Copy Default  
199  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
System setup  
16  
To change the menu options:  
USB setup  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Job Manage on the control panel.  
Item  
Description  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Active Job  
Store Job  
Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be printed.  
Shows the print job lists that are stored on the disk.  
If the memory already has the same name when you  
entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.  
Press USB on the touch screen.  
File Policy  
Option  
Print From  
Description  
15  
Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file to  
Image overwrite  
print.  
Sets scan destination to a USB. You scan the originals and  
save the scanned image to a USB device.  
Scan to USB  
File Manage  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Views the file list from the File Navigation. Select a file to  
delete. You can format the USB device.  
Show Space  
Shows the remaining space.  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > ImageOverwrite on the control panel.  
Item  
Description  
You can overwrite the embedded USB memory to clear  
all of the data stored in.  
Manual  
200  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
System setup  
17  
18  
Emulation setup  
Email setup  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Press Setup > Machine Setup > Email Setup on the touch screen.  
Press  
(Menu) > Print Setup > Emulation on the control panel.  
Option  
SMTP Server  
Description  
Item  
Description  
Sets the SMTP server configuration.  
The machine language defines how the computer  
communicates with the machine.  
Emulation Type  
Setup  
Sets to send the mail to yourself so that you can  
back up the email or use as a reminder.  
Send to Self  
Sets the detailed settings for the selected emulation type.  
Default To Address  
Default From  
Sets an email destination address as a default one.  
Sets a sender’s email address as a default one.  
Sets an email’s subject as a default one.  
Default Subject  
201  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
System setup  
19  
Doc Box Feature  
Address book setup  
Press  
(Menu) > Document Box > Doc Box Feature on the control  
panel.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Option  
Description  
Add From Scan  
Stores scanned documents in a box. The stored file will be  
named automatically as  
Press Setup > Machine Setup > Address Book on the touch screen.  
"yearmonthdayhourminutesecond".  
Task From Box  
Prints a document from a box.  
Option  
PhoneBook  
Description  
Adds, views, prints or deletes the phone book list. You  
also can create a group.  
Doc Box Setup  
Adds, views, prints or deletes the email list. You also can  
create a group.  
Email  
Press  
(Menu) > Document Box > Doc Box Setup on the control panel.  
20  
Option  
Description  
Document box setup  
Sets the default options for storing the document to a  
box.  
Add From Scan  
Task From Box  
Sets the default options for printing the document from a  
box.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
202  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
     
System setup  
21  
Option  
Wireless  
Description  
Network setup  
Selects this option to use the wireless network.  
Reverts the network settings to the default values.  
(Reboot required.)  
Clear Setting  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Network Conf.  
This list shows information on your machine’s network  
connection and configuration.  
Network  
Configuration  
Press  
(Menu)> Network on the control panel,  
Net. Activate  
Http Activate  
You can sets whether to use Ethernet on or off.  
Or press Setup > Machine Setup > Network Setup on the touch screen.  
You can sets whether to use SyncThru™ Web Service or  
not.  
Option  
Description  
Selects the appropriate protocol and configure  
parameters to use the network environment.  
TCP/IP (IPv4)  
There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are  
not sure, leave as is, or consult the network  
administrator.  
Selects this option to use the network environment  
TCP/IP (IPv6)  
Ethernet Speed  
Configure the network transmission speed.  
You can selects the user authentication for network  
communication. For detailed information consult the  
network administrator.  
802.1x  
203  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
 
Admin setup  
Item  
Description  
Sets the password to access the Admin Setup menu. Select  
On to use this option and enter the password.  
Password Protect  
Change  
Changes the machine’s password for accessing the Admin  
Password  
Setup.  
Clean Fuser: Cleans the fuser by printing a sheet. The  
printed sheet has toner debris on it.  
CLR Empty Msg.: Prevents the TonerLow Alert message  
from appearing on the display.  
Supplies Info.: Allows you to check how many pages are  
printed and how much toner is left in the cartridge.  
TonerLow Alert: If toner in the cartridge has run out, a  
message informing the user to change the toner  
cartridge appears. You can set the option for this  
message to appear or not.  
Maintenance  
Ram Disk: Enables/disables RAM disk to manage jobs.  
Depending on the installed optional memory size, you  
can set the RAM disk size to between 32 and 64 MB. This  
option does not appear if you have installed mass storage  
device (HDD).  
204  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
Custom setup  
This menu appears only when the XOA (eXtensible Open Architecture) web  
application is installed. Contact the administrator to use this menu.  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine (see "Menu overview" on  
Press  
(Menu)) > Custom on the control panel.  
205  
3. Useful Setting Menus  
   
4. Special Features  
This chapter explains special copying, scanning, faxing, and printing features.  
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7.  
It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower-level menus for some models.  
 
Altitude adjustment  
Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the  
height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you  
on how to set your machine for the best print quality.  
If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the altitude via  
SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page  
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.  
You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine’s  
4,000 m  
(13,123 ft)  
1
3,000 m  
(9,842 ft)  
2
2,000 m  
(6,561 ft)  
3
1,000 m  
(3,280 ft)  
4
0
1
2
3
4
High 3  
High 2  
High 1  
Normal  
You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager program or Machine section in Printer Settings Utility program.  
207  
4. Special Features  
   
Storing email address  
You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently via  
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by  
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.  
Click Apply.  
6
7
8
If you make a group, click Address Book > E-mail Group > Add Group.  
Select the Speed No. and enter Group Name.  
1
Storing on your machine  
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s)  
after this group is created.  
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up email  
address using SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Click Apply.  
9
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"  
1
2
Searching for an email address  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.  
2
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
3
Searching sequentially through memory  
ID: admin  
Select  
(scan) >  
(Address Book) > Search & Send > Select an  
Password: sec00000  
1
address group > All on the control panel.  
Click Address Book > Individual > Add.  
4
5
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Email >  
View List > Individual or Group on the touch screen.  
Select the Speed No. and enter e-mail address and fax number.  
Search through the entire memory in index (numerical) order, and select  
the name and address you want.  
2
If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information, check SMB or FTP and set  
the information.  
208  
4. Special Features  
       
Storing email address  
Searching with a particular first letter  
Select  
(scan) on the control panel.  
1
2
Press  
(Address Book) > Search & Send > Select an address group >  
ID on the control panel.  
Enter the first few letters of the name you want.  
Press the arrows until the name and number you want appears.  
3
4
209  
4. Special Features  
Entering various characters  
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers. For  
example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your  
company’s name, and the fax number. When you store fax numbers or email  
addresses in memory, you may also enter the corresponding names.  
Key  
1
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters  
@ / . ‘ 1  
2
A B C a b c 2  
D E F d e f 3  
G H I g h i 4  
J K L j k l 5  
3
3
Entering alphanumeric characters  
4
5
Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display. For example, to  
enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO. Each time you press 6, the display  
shows a different letter, M, N, O, m, n, o and finally 6. To find the letter that you  
6
M N O m n o 6  
7
P Q R S p q r s 7  
T U V t u v 8  
W X Y Z w x y z 9  
& + - , 0  
8
9
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.  
0
To delete the last digit or character, press the left/right or up/down arrow  
button.  
*
* % ^ _ ~ ! # $ ( ) [ ]  
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)  
4
#
# = | ? " : { } < > ;  
Keypad letters and numbers  
(These symbols are available when you type for network authentication.)  
Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its  
options or the models.  
Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you  
are doing.  
210  
4. Special Features  
     
Setting up the fax address book  
6
You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via  
SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by  
entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book.  
Using speed dial numbers  
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax,  
enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want.  
5
Registering a speed dial number  
For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the  
corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2  
seconds.  
Select  
the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on  
1
For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)  
and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone  
Book > View List > Individual >  
(options) > Add on the touch  
You can print the address book list by selecting  
(fax) >  
screen.  
(Address Book) > Print.  
Enter a speed dial number and press OK.  
2
7
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the  
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial  
Editing speed dial numbers  
number, press  
(Back).  
Select  
the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Speed Dial on  
1
Enter the name you want and press OK.  
3
4
5
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone  
Book > View List > Individual on the touch screen.  
Enter the fax number you want and press OK.  
Press the  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) button to return to ready mode.  
Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
2
3
Change the name and press OK.  
211  
4. Special Features  
         
Setting up the fax address book  
Change the fax number and press OK.  
When you have finished, select No when Another Number? appears  
and press OK.  
4
5
7
Press (Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
8
8
9
Registering a group dial number  
Editing group dial numbers  
Select  
the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on  
1
2
Select  
the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > New & Edit > Group Dial on  
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next >Address Book > Phone  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Address Book > Phone  
Book > View List > Group on the touch screen.  
Book > View List > Group>  
screen.  
(options) > Add on the touch  
Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.  
Enter a group dial number and press OK.  
2
3
Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK, then Add? appears.  
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display shows the  
message to allow you to change it. To start over with another speed dial  
Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK, Delete?  
appears.  
number, press  
(Back).  
Press OK to add or delete the number.  
4
5
6
7
Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial’s name to put in  
the group.  
Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers.  
Select No at the Another Number? and press OK.  
3
Select the name and number you want and press OK.  
Select Yes when Another Number? appears.  
4
5
6
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group.  
212  
4. Special Features  
   
Setting up the fax address book  
10  
Searching address book for an entry  
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan from  
A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the name  
associated with the number.  
Select ct  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > Search&Dial > Speed Dial  
1
or Group Dial on the control panel.  
Enter All or ID and press OK.  
2
3
Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter  
you want to search.  
For example, if you want to find the name “MOBILE,” press the 6 button,  
which is labeled with “MNO.”  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
4
11  
Printing address book  
You can check your  
(Address Book) settings by printing a list.  
Select ct  
(fax) >  
(Address Book) > Print on the control panel.  
1
The machine begins printing.  
2
213  
4. Special Features  
Registering authorized users  
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up the network  
parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network. To send  
a scanned image through email or via network server safely, you must register  
account information of authorized users to your local machine using SyncThru™  
Web Service.  
You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual(s)  
after this group is created.  
Click Apply.  
9
Access the SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web Service"  
1
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.  
2
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
3
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
Click Security > User Access Control > Authentication.  
4
5
Select Local Authentication in the Authentication Method, and click  
Apply.  
Click OK in the confirmation pop-up window.  
6
7
8
Click User Profile > Add.  
Enter User Name, Login ID, Password, Confirm Password, E-mail  
Address, and Fax Number.  
214  
4. Special Features  
   
Printing features  
For basic printing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic printing"  
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing  
Preferences.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
13  
Setting your machine as a default machine  
12  
Changing the default print settings  
Click the Windows Start menu.  
1
Click the Windows Start menu.  
Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.  
1
2
Select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.  
Select your machine.  
2
3
Right-click on your machine.  
Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.  
3
4
Select Printing preferences.  
4
If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer drivers  
connected to the selected printer.  
If Printing preferences has a , you can select other printer drivers  
connected to the selected printer.  
Change the settings on each tab.  
5
Click OK.  
6
215  
4. Special Features  
       
Printing features  
14  
Check the Print to file box in the Print window.  
1
Using advanced print features  
XPS printer driver: used to print XPS file format.  
The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or  
higher.  
Install optional memory when an XPS job does not print because the  
printer is out of memory.  
For models that provide XPS driver on the software CD:  
-
You can install the XPS printer driver when you insert the software CD  
into your CD-ROM drive. When the installation window appears,  
select Advanced Installation > Custom Installation. You can select  
the XPS printer driver in the Select Software and Utilities to Install  
window.  
Click Print.  
2
3
For models that provide XPS driver from the Samsung website,  
www.samsung.com > find your product> Support or downloads.  
Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK.  
For example, c:\Temp\file name.  
Printing to a file (PRN)  
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My  
Documents, Documents and Settings, or Users. The saved folder may  
differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are  
using.  
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file.  
216  
4. Special Features  
   
Printing features  
Understanding special printer features  
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print  
settings. The machine name, that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use.  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Select the Help menu or click the  
button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about (see "Using help"  
Item  
Description  
Multiple Pages per  
Side  
Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and  
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.  
217  
4. Special Features  
 
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
Prints a single-page document onto 4 (Poster 2x2), 9 (Poster 3x3), or 16 (Poster 4x4) sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets  
together to form one poster-size document.  
Poster Printing  
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab  
to make it easier to paste the sheets together.  
Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce  
a booklet.  
a
Booklet Printing  
If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media.  
9
8
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what  
paper sizes are available.  
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without  
mark).  
or  
Double-sided  
Printing  
Print on both sides of a sheet of paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented.  
Double-sided  
You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper  
Printing (Manual)  
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of  
the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.  
Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the duplex option.  
218  
4. Special Features  
 
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
Double-sided  
Printing  
Printer Default: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the control panel of the machine.  
This option is available only when you use the PCL/XPS printer driver.  
Double-sided  
None: Disables this feature.  
Printing (Manual)  
Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding.  
Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.  
Reverse Double-Sided Printing: Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing. This option is not available when you  
use Double-sided Printing (Manual).  
Paper Options  
Watermark  
Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the  
document.  
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters  
reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.  
219  
4. Special Features  
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.  
Watermark  
(Creating a  
watermark)  
You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.  
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options.  
d Click Update to save the changes.  
Watermark  
(Editing a watermark)  
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
a To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.  
c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.  
d Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
Watermark  
(Deleting a  
watermark)  
This option is available only when you use the PCL/SPL printer driver (see "Software" on page 7).  
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.  
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing  
exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load  
preprinted letterhead paper in the machine: just print the letterhead overlay on your document.  
Overlay  
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.  
The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.  
The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.  
220  
4. Special Features  
     
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
a To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences.  
b Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears.  
c In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.  
d In the Save As window, type a name up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default is  
C:\Formover).  
e Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.  
Overlay  
(Creating a new page  
overlay)  
f
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive.  
a Click the Advanced tab.  
b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.  
c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you  
want to use.  
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window.  
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay  
List box.  
Overlay  
(Using a page overlay)  
d If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a  
document for printing, asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document.  
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document.  
e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.  
a In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.  
b Select Edit in the Text drop down list.  
c Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.  
d Click Delete.  
Overlay  
(Deleting a page  
overlay)  
e When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.  
f
Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.  
221  
4. Special Features  
     
Printing features  
Item  
Description  
This feature is available only if you have installed the optional memory or mass storage device (HDD) (see "Variety feature" on page  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal, which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
Normal: This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory.  
Proof: This mode is useful when you print more than one copy. You can print one copy first to check, then print the rest of the copies later.  
Confidential: This mode is used for printing confidential documents. You need to enter a password to print.  
Store: Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device (HDD) without printing.  
Store and Print: This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time.  
Print Mode  
Spool: This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data. If you select this setting, the printer spools the document into the  
mass storage device (HDD) and then prints it from the mass storage device (HDD) queue, decreasing the computer’s work load.  
-
Print Schedule: Select this setting to print the document at a specified time.  
User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel.  
Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved file using the control panel.  
Encrypts printing data first, and transmits it to the machine. This feature protects the printing information even though the data is snatched on  
a network.  
Job Encryption  
Job Encryption feature is enabled only when the mass storage device (HDD) is installed. The mass storage device (HDD) is used to  
a. This option is not available when you use XPS driver.  
222  
4. Special Features  
Printing features  
15  
Printing  
Using Direct Printing Utility  
There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility.  
From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs > Samsung  
Printers > Direct Printing Utility > Direct Printing Utility.  
Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or  
optional goods (see "Software" on page 7).  
1
Available for Windows OS users only.  
The Direct Printing Utility window appears.  
Select your machine from the Select Printer drop-down list and click  
Browse.  
2
What is Direct Printing Utility?  
Select the file you wish to print and click Open.  
3
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your  
machine to print without having to opening the file.  
The file is added in the Select Files section.  
Customize the machine settings for your needs.  
To install this program, select Advanced Installation > Custom Installation  
and put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver.  
4
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.  
5
Mass storage device (HDD) should be installed on your machine, to print  
files using this program. (see "Variety feature" on page 10).  
Using the right-click menu  
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted. Deactivate the printing  
restriction feature and retry printing.  
Right-click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing.  
1
You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password. Deactivate  
the password feature, and retry printing.  
The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added.  
Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility  
program depends on how the PDF file was created.  
Select the machine to use.  
2
The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1.7 and below.  
For higher versions, you must open the file to print it.  
Customize the machine settings.  
3
223  
4. Special Features  
 
Printing features  
Click Print. The selected PDF file is sent to the machine.  
Changing printer settings  
4
16  
You can use advanced printing features when using your machine.  
Macintosh printing  
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name,  
which appears in the printer properties window, may differ depending on the  
machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties  
window is similar to the following.  
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It  
means that the features are not supported.  
Printing multiple pages on one sheet  
Printing a document  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature  
provides a cost-effective way to print draft copies.  
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver settings  
in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh:  
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.  
1
Open the document to print.  
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages  
per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print  
1
2
Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some  
applications).  
on one sheet of paper.  
2
Select the other options to use.  
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make  
sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.  
3
Click Print.  
4
The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet  
of paper.  
Open the File menu and click Print.  
4
Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.  
5
Click Print.  
6
224  
4. Special Features  
     
Printing features  
Printing on both sides of the paper  
Using help  
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on  
the topic you want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information  
about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.  
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It  
means that the features are not supported (see "Variety feature" on page  
10).  
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding  
your finished document. The binding options are, as follows:  
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book  
binding.  
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.  
From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File menu.  
1
Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.  
Select a binding orientation from the Two-Sided option.  
Select the other options to use.  
2
3
4
5
17  
Linux printing  
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It  
means that the features are not supported.  
Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.  
If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy might  
print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper  
when you are printing more than 1 copy.  
225  
4. Special Features  
       
Printing features  
Advanced: Sets the print resolution, paper source, and destination.  
Printing from applications  
Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.  
There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX  
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such  
application.  
5
6
7
Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.  
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your  
print job.  
Open an application, and select Print from the File menu  
1
To abort the current job, click Cancel.  
Select Print directly using lpr.  
2
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the  
3
Printing files  
printer list and click Properties.  
Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed  
at the top of the window.  
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard  
CUPS, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you  
to do that, but the driver’s package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much  
more user-friendly LPR GUI program.  
4
General: Changes the paper size, the paper type, and the  
orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds  
start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet.  
To print any document file:  
Enter lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and press  
Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.  
1
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on  
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other  
applications for odd-even printing.  
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print  
window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click  
Open.  
Text: Specifies the page margins and set the text options, such as  
spacing or columns.  
In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change  
the print job properties.  
2
Graphics: Sets image options that are used when printing image  
files, such as color options, image size, or image position.  
Click OK to start printing.  
3
226  
4. Special Features  
 
Printing features  
Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.  
Configuring Printer Properties  
4
18  
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration,  
you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer.  
Unix printing  
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.  
1
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.  
Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It  
means that the features are not supported (see "Features by models" on  
Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties.  
2
The Printer Properties window appears.  
3
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:  
Proceeding the print job  
General: Allows you to change the printer location and name. The  
name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers  
configuration.  
After installing the printer, choose any of the image, text, PS or HPGL files to  
print.  
Connection: Allows you to view or select another port. If you change  
the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you  
must re-configure the machine port in this tab.  
Execute “printui <file_name_to_print>” command.  
1
For example, if you are printing “document1”  
Driver: Allows you to view or select another machine driver. By  
clicking Options, you can set the default device options.  
printui document1  
This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the  
user can select various print options.  
Jobs: Shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the  
selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see  
previous jobs on the job list.  
Select a printer that has been already added.  
2
Classes: Shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class  
to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class  
to remove the machine from the selected class.  
Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection.  
3
Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies.  
4
227  
4. Special Features  
   
Printing features  
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver,  
press Properties.  
Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on  
models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other  
applications for odd-even printing.  
Press OK to start the print job.  
5
Multiple pages: Print several pages on one side of the paper.  
Page Border: Choose any of the border styles (e.g., Single-line hairline,  
Changing the machine settings  
Double-line hairline)  
The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various  
print options in printer Properties.  
Image tab  
In this tab, you can change the brightness, resolution, or image position of your  
document.  
The following hot keys may also be used: “H” for Help, “O” for OK, “A” for Apply,  
and “C” for Cancel.  
Text tab  
General tab  
Set the character margin, line space, or the columns of the actual print output.  
Paper Size: Set the paper size as A4, Letter, or other paper sizes, according  
to your requirements.  
HPGL/2 tab  
Paper Type: Choose the type of the paper. Options available in the list box  
are Printer Default, Plain, and Thick.  
Use only black pen: To print all graphics in black.  
Fit plot to page: Fit the entire graphic into a single page.  
Paper Source: Select from which tray the paper is used. By default, it is Auto  
Selection.  
Orientation: Select the direction in which information is printed on a page.  
Duplex: Print on both sides of paper to save paper.  
228  
4. Special Features  
Printing features  
Margins tab  
Use Margins: Set the margins for the document. By default, margins are not  
enabled. The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in  
the respective fields. Set by default, these values depend on the page size  
selected.  
Unit: Change the units to points, inches, or centimeters.  
Printer-Specific Settings tab  
Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various  
settings. These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file.  
229  
4. Special Features  
Scan features  
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network.  
The following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents:  
For basic scanning features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic scanning"  
Scan to PC: Scan the originals from the control panel. Then, the scanned  
data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder (see  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various  
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the  
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,depending  
on your system and what you are scanning, you may not be able to scan  
at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced dpi.  
TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning an  
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the  
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or the  
234).  
Samsung Scan Assistant/SmarThru 4/SmarThru Office: You can use this  
program to scan images or documents.  
19  
Basic scanning method  
-
-
-
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature, your  
computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable  
USB Memory: You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto  
an USB memory device.  
Email: You can send the scanned image as an email attachment (See  
FTP/SMB: You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP/SMB server (see  
230  
4. Special Features  
     
Scan features  
20  
21  
Setting the scan settings in the computer  
Scanning from network connected machine  
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD,  
since the printer driver includes the scan program (see "Installing the driver  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
1
Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager (see "Using Samsung Easy  
1
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.  
Select  
(Scan) > Scan to PC > Network PC on the control panel.  
2
2
Or select Scan > Network PC on the touch screen.  
Select Scan to PC Settings menu.  
3
Select the option you want.  
4
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.  
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on  
the device.  
Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if  
necessary.  
3
Profile: Displays the scanning profiles saved on the selected device.  
Basic tab: Contains settings related to general scan and device  
settings.  
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.  
Press OK.  
5
231  
4. Special Features  
   
Scan features  
Setting up an email account  
ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager > Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PCSettings.  
Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy  
1
Select Settings > Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).  
Printer Manager >  
Settings.  
Switch to advanced mode > Scan to PC  
2
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
3
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
Select the option you want and press OK.  
4
4
5
Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require  
authentication.  
Scanning begins.  
5
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.  
Scanned image is saved in computer’s C:\Users\users  
name\Pictures\folder. The saved folder may differ, depending on your  
operating system or the application you are using.  
6
Press Apply.  
7
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP, put a  
check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication.  
22  
Scanning to email  
Enter the IP address and port number.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
232  
4. Special Features  
     
Scan features  
23  
Scanning and sending an email  
Scanning to FTP/SMB server  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
1
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
Select  
(scan) > Scan to Email on the control panel.  
2
Or select Scan > Send Email on the touch screen.  
Setting up an FTP/SMB server  
Enter the login name and password if you configured on SyncThru™ Web  
3
4
1
Enter the sender’s and recipient’s email address.  
Select Address Book > Individual > Add.  
2
You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto Send To Self  
option in the Settings > Scan > Scan To E-mail on SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB.  
3
Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.  
4
Enter an email subject and press OK.  
5
6
7
8
Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.  
5
Select the file format to scan, and press OK.  
Enter the SMTP server login name and password.  
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.  
Check the box next to Anonymous, then the server permits the access  
of unauthorized people.  
6
Enter the login name and password.  
7
Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain,  
otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB  
server.  
8
233  
4. Special Features  
     
Scan features  
24  
Enter the path for saving the scanned image.  
9
Scanning from image editing program  
The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root.  
The folder properties need to be setup as a share.  
You can scan and import documents at the image editing software such as  
Adobe Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below  
to scan with TWAIN-compliant software:  
Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder.  
Press Apply.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
10  
1
Scanning and sending to FTP/SMB server  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
2
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.  
1
Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
3
2
Click File > Import, and select the scanner device.  
4
Set the scan options.  
Select  
(scan) > Scan to SMB or Scan to FTP on the control panel.  
5
3
Or select Scan > SMB or FTP on the touch screen.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
6
Select a server and scan format you want.  
4
5
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the  
specified server.  
234  
4. Special Features  
   
Scan features  
25  
Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your  
preferences affect the picture.  
6
7
Scanning using the WIA driver  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for  
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft  
Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN  
driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using  
additional software:  
26  
Scanning with Samsung Scan Assistant  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
The WIA driver works only on Windows OS (not supported Windows 2000)  
with a USB port.  
You can use the OCR (Optical Character Reader) feature from Samsung  
Scan Assistant program.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
2
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and  
3
Printers.  
Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers, and start Samsung  
Scan Assistant.  
3
Right-click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes > Start Scan.  
4
New Scan application appears.  
Select the Help menu or click the  
button from the window and click on  
5
any option you want to know about.  
235  
4. Special Features  
       
Scan features  
Set the scan options.  
Print: You can print images you have saved.  
4
Click Scan.  
5
Select the Help menu or click the  
any option you want to know about.  
button from the window and click on  
27  
Scanning with SmarThru 4  
Click Scan to.  
5
6
7
8
Select destination among Application, E-mail, Folder, OCR, or Web.  
If needed, click Settings to customize the settings.  
Click Scan.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
You can use the OCR (Optical Character Reader) feature from SmarThru 4  
program.  
28  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
2
Scanning with SmarThru Office  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
To use SmarThru Office, you have to install the program manually from  
the supplied CD. Select Advanced Installation > Custom Installation  
and choose SmarThru Office to install.  
Double-click the SmarThru 4 icon.  
3
4
The SmarThru appears.  
You can use the OCR (Optical Character Reader) feature from SmarThru  
Office program.  
Scan to: You can scan an image and save it to an application or  
folder, email it, or publish it on a web site.  
Image: You can edit an image and send it to a selected application  
or folder, email it, or publish it on a web site.  
236  
4. Special Features  
       
Scan features  
29  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
1
Macintosh scanning  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
2
Scanning from USB connected machine  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
powered on.  
Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.  
1
3
The SmarThru Office appears.  
4
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder (see "Loading originals" on  
2
Click the Help or  
button from the window and click on any option you  
want to know about.  
Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
3
Click the SmarThru Office icon (  
taskbar to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.  
) in the tray area of the Windows  
5
If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect the  
USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem continues, refer to the Image  
Capture’s help.  
Click the scanning icon (  
) to open the scanning window.  
6
7
8
The Scan Setting window opens.  
Set scan settings and click Scan.  
Select the option you want.  
4
Scan and save your scanned image.  
5
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the latest  
version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.  
237  
4. Special Features  
 
Scan features  
-
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps  
above.  
Scanning from network connected machine  
For 10.7, select your device below SHARED.  
Network or wireless model only (see "Features by models" on page 7).  
Set the scan options on this program.  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
5
6
Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.  
1
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
2
If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the  
latest version. Image Capture operates properly Mac OS X 10.4.7 or  
higher.  
For more information, refer to the Image Capture’s help.  
Start Applications and click Image Capture.  
3
You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe  
Photoshop.  
According to OS, follow steps below.  
4
For 10.4  
-
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.  
30  
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that Use  
TWAIN software checkbox is checked.  
Linux scanning  
-
Click Connect.  
Scanning  
If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port,  
or If TWAIN UI appears, click Change Port.. from the Preference  
tab and select a new port.  
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and  
1
powered on.  
For 10.5  
-
-
Click Devices > Browse Devices on Menu bar.  
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.  
2
3
Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your  
machine in Bonjour Devices.  
Click the  
button to switch to Scanners Configuration.  
238  
4. Special Features  
   
Scan features  
Select the scanner on the list.  
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the  
Preview Pane.  
4
8
Click Properties.  
5
Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview  
Pane.  
9
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
6
Select the option you want.  
10  
11  
Scan and save your scanned image.  
From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.  
7
For later use, you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job Type  
drop-down list.  
239  
4. Special Features  
Scan features  
Editing an image with Image Manager  
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools  
to edit your scanned image.  
240  
4. Special Features  
Fax features  
32  
For basic faxing features, refer to the Basic Guide (see "Basic faxing" on  
Redialing the fax number  
This function is not supported for SCX-470x Series (see "Features by  
Press  
(Redial/Pause) button on the control panel.  
1
2
Select the fax number you want.  
31  
Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown.  
Automatic redialing  
When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine  
automatically begins to send.  
3
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send  
a fax, the machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on  
the country's factory default setting.  
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,  
select No when Another Page? appears.  
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press  
(Start) button to redial the  
33  
number without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press  
(Cancel  
Confirming a transmission  
or Stop/Clear).  
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts.  
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine  
beeps and returns to ready mode.  
Press  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu)> Fax Setup > Sending on the control  
1
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears  
on the display. If you receive an error message, press  
to clear the message and try to send the fax again.  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear)  
Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want.  
2
3
Select the option you want.  
241  
4. Special Features  
       
Fax features  
Click Print or OK.  
4
5
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each  
Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option  
time sending a fax is completed. Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup  
> Sending > Send Report on the control panel.  
34  
Sending a fax in the computer  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.  
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program  
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the printer  
driver.  
Open the document to be sent.  
Select the Help menu or click the  
any option you want to know about.  
button from the window and click on  
1
Select Print from the File menu.  
2
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different  
depending on your application.  
Click Send.  
6
Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window  
3
242  
4. Special Features  
   
Fax features  
35  
Enter the job name and the time.  
8
9
Delaying a fax transmission  
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at that time  
on the following day.  
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be  
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.  
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder.  
1
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you  
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.  
Press  
Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs.  
Press (Menu) > Fax Feature > Delay Send on the control panel.  
(fax) on the control panel.  
2
3
4
You can check the list of delayed fax jobs.  
Press  
(Menu) > System Setup > Report > Schdule Jobs on the control  
panel.  
Or select Fax > Delayed Send > To on the touch screen.  
Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.  
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.  
5
6
7
Adding documents to a reserved fax  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes highlights and repeat  
steps 5.  
1
documents face up into the document feeder.  
Press  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Add Pages on the control  
2
3
You can add up to 10 destinations.  
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another group  
dial numbers anymore.  
Select the fax job and press OK.  
When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears. The  
machine scans the original into memory.  
243  
4. Special Features  
     
Fax features  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder.  
4
1
2
Press  
(Fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Priority Send on the  
Canceling a reserved fax job  
control panel.  
Press  
panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Cancel Job on the control  
Or select Fax > Priority Send > To on the touch screen.  
Enter the destination fax number and press OK.  
Enter the job name and press OK.  
1
3
4
5
Select the fax job you want and press OK.  
2
3
Press OK when Yes highlights.  
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another  
pages. Load another original and press OK.  
The selected fax is deleted from memory.  
Press  
(Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
When you have finished, select No when Another Page? appears.  
4
The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.  
36  
37  
Sending a priority fax  
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination  
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of reserved  
operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately transmitted  
when the current operation is finished.  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination  
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,  
this feature may be useful.  
244  
4. Special Features  
         
Fax features  
38  
When you forward a fax by an email, you must first set the mail server and  
IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service (see "Using SyncThru™ Web  
Forwarding a received fax  
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination  
by a fax, an email or a server. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax,  
this feature may be useful.  
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in  
grayscale.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder.  
Though you sent or received a color fax, the data is forwarded in grayscale.  
1
2
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Forward > Fax > Send  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Forward > Fax, Email, or  
Forward > On on the control panel.  
1
Server > Receive Forward > Forward on the control panel.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Fax Setup > Forward > Fax, Email,  
or Server > Send Forward > On on the touch screen.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Fax Setup > Forward > Fax, Email,  
or Server > Receive Forward > On on the touch screen.  
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional  
Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional  
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and  
press OK.  
3
4
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been  
completed, select Forward & Print.  
2
3
4
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Enter the destination fax number, email address, or server address and  
press OK.  
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.  
Enter the starting tim and ending time, then press OK.  
245  
4. Special Features  
   
Fax features  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Press OK.  
5
3
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.  
40  
39  
Receiving a fax in the computer  
Sending faxes on both sides of paper  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
This is available only when you load originals into the document feeder.  
To use this feature, set the option on the control panel:  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Forward > PC > On the  
control panel.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Forward > PC  
> On on the touch screen.  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder.  
1
2
Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager.  
Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List.  
Select Fax to PC Settings menu.  
1
2
3
4
Press  
(fax) > Duplex on the control panel.  
Or select Fax > Select the menu you want > Select Duplex from the sub-  
menus > on the touch screen.  
Use Set Fax Receiving to change the fax settings.  
Off: Send faxes in normal mode.  
Enable Fax Receiving From Device: Select whether to use or not.  
Image Type: Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF.  
Save Location: Select location to save the converted faxes.  
Prefix: Select file or folder scheme as prefix.  
2 Side: Send faxes on both sides of the original.  
2->1Side ROT2: Send faxes on both sides of the original and prints  
each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side  
of the printout is rotated 180°.  
246  
4. Special Features  
   
Fax features  
Print received fax: After receiving the fax, set prints information for  
the received fax.  
Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine attached to your  
machine. Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can  
leave a message on the answering machine. If the fax machine  
senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to  
Fax mode to receive the fax.  
Notify me when complete: Set to show the popup window to  
notify receiving a fax.  
Open with default application: After receiving the fax, open it with  
default application.  
To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the EXT socket  
on the back of your machine.  
None: After receiving a fax, the machine does not notify the user or  
opens the application.  
DRPD: you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern  
Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company  
service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to  
answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see  
Press OK.  
5
41  
Changing the receive modes  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Receive Mode  
1
This setting may not be available depending on your country.  
on the control panel.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax  
Default > Common > Receive Mode on the touch screen.  
Press OK.  
3
4
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
Select the option you want.  
2
Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax  
reception mode.  
Tel: Receives a fax by pressing  
(On Hook Dial) and then Start.  
247  
4. Special Features  
   
Fax features  
42  
44  
Receiving manually in Tel mode  
Receiving faxes with an extension telephone  
When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket, you  
can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone,  
without going to the fax machine.  
You can receive a fax call by pressing  
(On Hook Dial) button and then  
pressing  
(Start) when you hear a fax tone. If your machine has a handset,  
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the  
keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.  
43  
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last  
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you  
want.  
Receiving in Answering Machine/Fax mode  
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on  
the back of your machine. If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine  
stores the message. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it  
automatically starts to receive the fax.  
While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket, copy  
and scan features are not available.  
If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine  
is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket,  
your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined  
number of rings.  
45  
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode  
If the answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the  
machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.  
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a  
single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. This  
feature is often used by answering services who answer telephones for many  
different clients and need to know which number someone is calling in on to  
properly answer the phone.  
If the machine is in Tel mode, disconnect or switch off the answering  
machine with the fax machine. Otherwise, the outgoing message from  
the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation.  
248  
4. Special Features  
           
Fax features  
46  
Select  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > DRPD Mode  
1
> Waiting Ring on the control panel.  
Receiving in secure receiving mode  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Default Setting > Fax  
Default > Common > Receive Mode > DRPD on the touch screen.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
Call your fax number from another telephone.  
2
3
When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine  
requires several rings to learn the pattern.  
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by  
unauthorized people. Turn on secure receiving mode, then all incoming faxes  
go into memory. You can print the incoming faxes with entering the password.  
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed  
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.  
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2.  
4
To use the secure receiving mode, activate the menu from  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive on the control panel.  
DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect  
the machine to another telephone line.  
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive on  
the touch screen.  
After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the  
machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call placed to a different  
number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the  
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.  
Printing received faxes  
Select  
on the control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Feature > Secure Receive > Print  
1
Or select Setup > Machine Setup > Next > Fax Setup > Secure Receive  
> Print on the touch screen.  
Enter a four-digit password and press OK.  
2
249  
4. Special Features  
   
Fax features  
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.  
Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad.  
3
2
47  
Printing faxes on both sides of the paper  
3
5
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
Press OK.  
3
4
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
48  
Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the  
documents face up into the document feeder.  
Receiving faxes in memory  
1
2
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are  
making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing,  
your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon as you finish  
copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.  
Press  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Receiving > Duplex Print  
on the control panel.  
Off: Prints in Normal mode.  
Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.  
If fax is received and being printed, other copy and print jobs cannot be  
processed at the same time.  
250  
4. Special Features  
   
Fax features  
49  
Printing sent fax report automatically  
You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the  
previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.  
Press  
control panel.  
(fax) >  
(Menu) > Fax Setup > Auto Report > On on the  
1
2
Press  
(Cancel or Stop/Clear) to return to ready mode.  
251  
4. Special Features  
 
Using shared folder features  
51  
This feature allows you to use the machine’s memory as a shared folder. The  
advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder  
through your computer’s window.  
Using the shared folder  
You can use the shared folder in the same way exactly like the normal computer.  
Create, edit and delete the folder or file as a normal Windows folder. You also  
store the scanned data in the shared folder. You can directly print files stored on  
a the shared folder. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG and PRN files.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device  
The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict the user’ s  
access and also set the maximum number of simultaneous users.  
50  
Creating a shared folder  
Open the Windows Explore window from the computer.  
1
Enter the printer’s \\[ip address] (example: \\169.254.133.42) in  
the address field, and press the Enter key or click Go.  
2
Create a new folder under nfsroot directory.  
3
252  
4. Special Features  
   
Using memory/hard drive features  
From the control panel  
You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device  
If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive, you can use  
these features from the  
(Menu) button> System Setup > Job  
Management.  
52  
Active Job: All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active  
job queue in the order you sent them to the printer. You can delete a job  
Setting up the optional memory  
from the queue before printing, or promote a job to print sooner.  
From the printer driver  
File Policy: You can choose the file policy for generating file name before  
you proceed with the job through optional memory. If the optional memory  
already has the same name when you entered a new file name, you can  
rename or overwrite it.  
After installing the optional memory, you can use advanced printing features,  
such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a private job in the Print  
window. Select Properties or Preference, and configure the printing mode.  
Stored Job: You can print or delete a stored job.  
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
After installing the hard drive, you can also print the predefined  
document templates from the  
(Menu) button > System Setup >  
Form Menu.  
253  
4. Special Features  
     
Easy Capture Manager  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7).  
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 7).  
Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key. Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited.  
255  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Samsung AnyWeb Print  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7).  
Available for Windows and Macintosh OS users only (see "Software" on page 7).  
This tool helps you screen-capture, preview, scrap, and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily, than when you use an ordinary program. Click Start > All  
programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version to link to the website where the tool is available for download.  
256  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Easy Eco Driver  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods (see "Software" on page 7).  
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 7).  
With the Easy Eco Driver, you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing. To use this application, Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job  
checkbox in the printer properties should be checked.  
Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts, changing fonts, and more. You can save frequently used settings as a preset.  
How to use:  
1
2
Open a document to print.  
Print the document.  
A preview window appears.  
3
4
Select the options you want to apply to the document.  
You can see the preview of the applied features.  
Click Print.  
257  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.  
1
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for  
SyncThru™ Web Service.  
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.  
2
SyncThru™ Web Service explanation in this user’s guide may differ from  
your machine depending on its options or models.  
ID: admin  
Password: sec00000  
2
1
SyncThru™ Web Service overview  
Accessing SyncThru™ Web Service  
Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
1
Enter the machine IP address of your printer (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in  
the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.  
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
2
Information tab  
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service  
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check  
things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an  
error report.  
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an  
administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but  
you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab.  
Active Alerts: Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their  
severity.  
Supplies: Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in  
the cartridge.  
258  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
Usage Counters: Shows the usage count by print types: simplex and  
duplex.  
User Access Control: Classifies users into several groups according to each  
user’s role. Each user’s authorization, authentication and accounting will be  
controlled by the group’s role definition.  
Current Settings: Shows the machine’s and network’s information.  
Print information: Prints reports such as system related reports, e-mail  
Maintenance tab  
address, and font reports.  
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and  
setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to  
Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.  
Settings tab  
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and  
network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.  
Firmware Upgrade: Upgrade your machine’s firmware.  
Contact Information: Shows the contact information.  
Machine Settings tab: Sets options provided by your machine.  
Link: Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check  
Network Settings tab: Shows options for the network environment. Sets  
information.  
options such as TCP/IP and network protocols.  
3
Security tab  
E-mail notification setup  
This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to  
log-in as an administrator to view this tab.  
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By  
setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP  
server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine  
error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be  
used more frequently by a machine administrator.  
System Security: Sets the system administrator’s information and also  
enables or disables machine features.  
Network Security: Sets settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x,  
and Authentication servers.  
259  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using SyncThru™ Web Service  
4
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
1
Setting the system administrator’s information  
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field  
and press the Enter key or click Go.  
This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option.  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
2
3
Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.  
From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification.  
1
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field  
and press the Enter key or click Go.  
If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings >  
Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network  
environment before setting e-mail notification.  
Your machine’s embedded website opens.  
2
From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator  
3
Select Enable check box to use the E-mail Notification.  
Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location, and email  
address.  
4
5
4
Click Add button to add e-mail notification user.  
Click Apply.  
Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items  
you want to receive an alert for.  
5
Click Apply.  
6
If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that  
case, contact the a network administrator.  
260  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
Open the Applications folder > Samsung folder > Samsung Easy Printer  
Manager.  
This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods  
The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic  
sections as described in the table that follows:  
Available for Windows and Macintosh OS users only (see "Software" on  
For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum  
requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager.  
The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using.  
Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung  
machine settings into one location. Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines  
device settings as well as printing environments, settings/actions and  
launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your  
Samsung machine. Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user  
interfaces for the user to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced  
user interface. Switching between the two interfaces is easy: just click a button.  
5
Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
To open the program:  
For Windows,  
Select Start > Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung  
Easy Printer Manager > Samsung Easy Printer Manager.  
Printer list  
The Printer List displays printers installed on your  
computer and network printers added by network  
discovery (Windows only).  
1
For Macintosh,  
261  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
Printer  
information  
This area gives you general information about your  
machine. You can check information, such as the machine’s  
model name, IP address (or Port name), and machine  
status.  
Quick links  
Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This  
section also includes links to applications in the advanced  
settings.  
4
If you connect your machine to a network, the  
SyncThru™ Web Service icon is enabled.  
2
You can view the online User’s Guide.  
Troubleshooting button: This button opens the  
Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs.  
You can directly open the necessary section in the  
user’s guide.  
Contents area  
Displays information about the selected machine,  
remaining toner level, and paper. The information will vary  
based on the machine selected. Some machines do not  
have this feature.  
5
6
Application  
information  
Includes links for changing to the advanced settings,  
preference, help, and about.  
Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering  
window. You can order replacement toner cartridge(s)  
from online.  
3
The  
button is used to change the user  
interface to the advanced settings user interface  
Select the Help menu or click the  
any option you want to know about.  
button from the window and click on  
6
Advanced settings user interface overview  
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible  
for managing the network and machines.  
262  
5. Useful Management Tools  
 
Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager  
Fax to PC Settings  
Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or  
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.  
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected  
device.  
Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device.  
Device Settings  
Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and allow  
more options to be set.  
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper,  
layout, emulation, network, and print information.  
Alert Settings (Windows only)  
Scan to PC Settings  
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.  
Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.  
Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.  
Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.  
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.  
Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the  
device.  
Profile: Displays the scanning profiles saved on the selected device.  
Basic tab: Contains settings related general scan and device settings.  
Image tab: Contains settings related to image altering.  
Job Accounting  
Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user.  
This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting  
software such as SyncThru™ or CounThru™ admin software.  
263  
5. Useful Management Tools  
 
Using Samsung Printer Status  
The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the  
Icon  
Mean  
Normal  
Description  
machine status.  
The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no  
errors or warnings.  
The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s  
guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.  
Warning  
Error  
The machine is in a state where an error might occur in  
the future. For example, it might be in toner low status,  
which may lead to toner empty status.  
Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine  
Available for Windows OS users only (see "Software" on page 7).  
The machine has at least one error.  
7
Samsung Printer Status overview  
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Samsung  
Printer Status. Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install  
the machine software.  
You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing  
Preferences, click the Basic tab > Printer Status button.  
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:  
Toner Level  
Option  
You can view the level of toner remaining in each  
toner cartridge. The machine and the number of  
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may  
differ depending on the machine in use. Some  
machines do not have this feature.  
1
2
You can set printing job alert related settings.  
264  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using Samsung Printer Status  
Order Supplies  
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from  
online.  
3
User’s Guide  
You can view the online User’s Guide.  
This button opens the Troubleshooting  
Guide when an error occurs. You can directly  
open the troubleshooting section in the  
user’s guide.  
4
5
Close  
Close the window.  
265  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using Smart Panel  
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine’s status,  
and allows you to customize the machine’s settings. You can download Smart  
Toner Level  
You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner  
cartridge. The machine and the number of toner  
cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ  
depending on the machine in use. If you cannot see  
this feature, it is not applicable to your machine.  
1
2
The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user’s guide may  
differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.  
Buy Now  
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from  
online.  
Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine  
User’s Guide  
You can view the online User’s Guide.  
Available for Linux OS users only (see "Software" on page 7).  
This button opens the Troubleshooting  
Guide when an error occurs. You can directly  
open the troubleshooting section in the user’s  
guide.  
8
3
Smart Panel overview  
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Smart Panel.  
You can also launch Smart Panel manually.  
Printer Setting  
You can configure various machine settings in the  
Printer Settings Utility window. Some machines do not  
have this feature.  
Double-click the Smart Panel icon(  
) in the Notification Area.  
4
If you connect your machine to a network, the  
SyncThru™ Web Service window appears  
instead of the Printer Settings Utility.  
2
3
4
1
266  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using Smart Panel  
9
Changing Smart Panel’s settings  
Right-click in Linux on the Smart Panel icon and select Configure smart panel.  
Select the settings you want from the Configure smart panel window.  
267  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator  
10  
The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring  
machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver  
Opening Unified Driver Configurator  
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.  
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver Configurator  
icon will automatically be created on your desktop.  
1
2
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified  
Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.  
Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding  
configuration window.  
1
2
Printer Configuration  
Port Configuration  
268  
5. Useful Management Tools  
   
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator  
Printers tab  
To use the on screen help, the Help or  
button from the window.  
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon  
button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window.  
After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver  
3
Configurator.  
11  
Printers configuration  
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.  
1
2
3
Switches to Printers configuration.  
Shows all of the installed machines.  
Shows the status, model name, and URI of your machine.  
269  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator  
The printer control buttons are, as follows:  
Classes tab  
Refresh: Renews the available machines list.  
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.  
Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.  
Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.  
Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine.  
Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.  
Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working  
properly.  
Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer’s properties.  
1
2
Shows all of the machine classes.  
Shows the status of the class and the number of machines  
in the class.  
Refresh: Renews the classes list.  
Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.  
Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.  
270  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator  
12  
1
2
Switches to Ports configuration.  
Ports configuration  
Shows all of the available ports.  
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each  
port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has  
terminated the job for any reason.  
Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and  
status.  
3
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.  
Release port: Releases the selected port.  
271  
5. Useful Management Tools  
Paper feeding problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Paper jams during printing.  
Paper sticks together.  
Clear the paper jam.  
Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.  
Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper.  
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper.  
Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together.  
Multiple sheets of paper do not feed.  
Paper does not feed into the machine.  
Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight.  
Remove any obstructions from inside the machine.  
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray.  
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.  
The paper keeps jamming.  
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the  
manual feeding in tray.  
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine.  
There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris.  
Transparencies stick together in the paper Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine.  
exit.  
Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly.  
Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes.  
273  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Power and cable connecting problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine is not receiving power,  
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a  
Disconnect the machine’s cable and reconnect it.  
(Power) button on the control, press it.  
or the connection cable between the  
computer and the machine is not  
connected properly.  
274  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not  
print.  
The machine is not receiving power.  
Connect the machine to the electricity supply first. If the machine has a  
button on the control, press it.  
(Power)  
The machine is not selected as the default  
machine.  
Select your machine as your default machine in Windows.  
Check the machine for the following:  
The cover is not closed. Close the cover.  
The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 75).  
Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 75).  
If a system error occurs, contact your service representative.  
The connection cable between the computer and Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
the machine is not connected properly.  
The connection cable between the computer and If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job.  
the machine is defective.  
You can also try using a different machine cable.  
The port setting is incorrect.  
Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct  
port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to  
the correct one.  
275  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct.  
Uninstall and reinstall the machine’s driver.  
The machine does not  
print.  
The machine may be configured incorrectly.  
The printer driver may be incorrectly installed.  
The machine is malfunctioning.  
Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a  
system error. Contact a service representative.  
The document size is so big that the hard disk  
space of the computer is insufficient to access the  
print job.  
Get more hard disk space and print the document again.  
The output tray is full.  
Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing.  
The machine selects print The paper option that was selected in the  
materials from the wrong Printing Preferences may be incorrect.  
paper source.  
For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab  
Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen (see "Using help" on  
A print job is extremely  
slow.  
The job may be very complex.  
Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings.  
Half the page is blank.  
The page orientation setting may be incorrect.  
Change the page orientation in your application (see "Opening printing preferences" on  
The paper size and the paper size settings do not Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.  
match.  
Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection  
in the software application settings you use (see "Opening printing preferences" on  
The machine prints, but  
the text is wrong,  
garbled, or incomplete.  
The machine cable is loose or defective.  
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already  
printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer  
that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable.  
276  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The wrong printer driver was selected.  
The software application is malfunctioning.  
The operating system is malfunctioning.  
Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected.  
Try printing a job from another application.  
Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again.  
Pages print, but they are The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner.  
Redistribute the toner, if necessary.  
blank.  
If necessary, replace the toner cartridge.  
The file may have blank pages.  
Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages.  
Contact a service representative.  
Some parts, such as the controller or the board,  
may be defective.  
The machine does not  
print PDF files correctly.  
Some parts of graphics,  
text, or illustrations are  
missing.  
Incompatibility between the PDF file and the  
Acrobat products.  
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image  
from the Acrobat printing options.  
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.  
The print quality of  
photos is not good.  
Images are not clear.  
The resolution of the photo is very low.  
Using damp paper can cause vapor during  
Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the  
resolution will be reduced.  
Before printing, the  
This is not a problem. Just keep printing.  
machine emits vapor near printing.  
the output tray.  
277  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing problems  
Condition  
Possible cause  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not  
print special-sized paper,  
such as billing paper.  
Paper size and paper size setting do not match.  
Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences (see  
The printed billing paper The paper type setting does not match.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab,  
is curled.  
278  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there  
might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem.  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Light or faded print  
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. Install a new toner cartridge (see "Replacing the  
The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.  
If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn  
the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver.  
A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine  
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page  
79). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
The top half of the paper is  
printed lighter than the rest of  
the paper  
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see  
279  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Toner specks  
The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough.  
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 79).  
The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 79).  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
A aB bC c  
Dropouts  
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page:  
A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job.  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
A a B b C  
The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper.  
The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.  
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thick (see "Opening  
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
If white spots appear on the page:  
White Spots  
The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine, so the transfer roller may be  
dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 79).  
The paper path may need cleaning. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 79).  
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
280  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Vertical lines  
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and  
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:  
The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page  
79). If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
Black or color background  
If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable:  
Change to a lighter weight paper.  
Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount  
of background shading.  
Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 75).  
Thoroughly redistribute the toner (see "Redistributing toner" on page 74).  
Toner smear  
Check the paper type and quality.  
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 75).  
281  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals:  
Vertical repetitive defects  
The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one (see  
Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after  
a few more pages.  
The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative.  
Background scatter  
Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page.  
The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that  
the paper does not absorb too much moisture.  
If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams  
on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems.  
A
Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57).  
If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application  
or in Printing Preferences (see "Opening printing preferences" on page 57). Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example:  
If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem.  
If you are using a new toner cartridge, redistribute the toner first (see "Redistributing toner" on page 74).  
Toner particles are around bold The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper.  
characters or pictures  
Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled (see  
Ensure the correct paper type is selected. For example: If Thicker Paper is selected, but Plain Paper actually used, an overcharging  
can occur causing this copy quality problem.  
282  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Misformed characters  
If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper.  
Page skew  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality.  
Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack.  
Curl or wave  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl.  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
283  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Wrinkles or creases  
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
Check the paper type and quality.  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Back of printouts are dirty  
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 79).  
Solid color or black pages  
The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.  
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on  
The machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.  
284  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Loose toner  
Check the paper type and quality.  
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 75).  
If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative.  
Character voids  
Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black:  
If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character  
voids are normal.  
You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around.  
The paper may not meet paper specifications.  
A
Horizontal stripes  
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear:  
The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.  
The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on  
If the problem persists, the machine may require repairing. Contact a service representative.  
285  
6. Troubleshooting  
Printing quality problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Curl  
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine:  
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.  
Change the printer’s paper option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set type to Thin (see  
An unknown image  
Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.  
repetitively appears on a few  
sheets  
The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the altitude setting for your machine (see  
Loose toner  
Light print or contamination  
occurs  
286  
6. Troubleshooting  
Copying problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Copies are too light or too dark. Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies (see "Changing the settings for each copy" on page  
61).  
If the defect still appears after  
cleaning the machine.  
set the Copy Feature > Adjust Background > Auto. (see "Menu overview" on page 31).  
Smears, lines, marks, or spots  
appear on copies.  
If the defects are on the original, adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies.  
If there are no defects on the original, clean the scan unit (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 83).  
Copy image is skewed.  
Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide.  
The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine (see "Cleaning the machine" on page 79).  
Blank copies print out.  
Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder.  
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative.  
Image rubs off the copy easily.  
Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package.  
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time.  
Frequent copy paper jams  
occur.  
Fan the paper, then turn it over in the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if  
necessary.  
Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight (see "Print media specifications" on page 105).  
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared.  
Toner cartridge produces fewer  
copies than expected before  
running out of toner.  
Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or heavy lines. For example, your originals may be forms, newsletters, books, or other  
documents that use more toner.  
The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made.  
Turn the machine off and back on.  
287  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Scanning problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The scanner does not work.  
Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass, or face up in the document feeder (see  
There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan. Try the Prescan function to see if that works.  
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.  
Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly.  
Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective. Switch the printer cable with a known good cable. If necessary, replace  
the printer cable.  
Check that the scanner is configured correctly. Check scan setting in the SmarThru Office or the application you want to use to make  
certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port (for example, USB001).  
The unit scans very slowly.  
Check if the machine is printing received data. If so, scan the document after the received data has been printed.  
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.  
Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned  
image. Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It will help to increase the speed. For details about how  
to set BIOS, refer to your computer user’s guide.  
288  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Scanning problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
Message appears on your  
computer screen:  
There may be a copying or printing job in progress. Try your job again when that job is finished.  
The selected port is currently being used. Restart your computer and try again.  
The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.  
The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly.  
Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on, then restart your computer.  
The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off.  
Device can’t be set to the H/W  
mode you want.  
Port is being used by another  
program.  
Port is disabled.  
Scanner is busy receiving or  
printing data. When the  
current job is completed, try  
again.  
Invalid handle.  
Scanning has failed.  
289  
6. Troubleshooting  
Faxing problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine is not working,  
there is no display, or the  
buttons are not working.  
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.  
Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet.  
Ensure that the power is turned on.  
No dial tone.  
Check that the phone line is properly connected (see "Rear view" on page 23).  
Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone.  
The numbers stored in memory Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly. To check that, print an address book list.  
do not dial correctly.  
The original does not feed into  
the machine.  
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the original is the right size, not too thick  
or thin.  
Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed.  
The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced. Contact a service representative (see "Available maintenance parts" on  
Faxes are not received  
automatically.  
The receiving mode should be set to fax (see "Changing the receive modes" on page 247).  
Make sure that there is paper in the tray (see "Print media specifications" on page 105).  
Check to see if the display shows any error message. If it does, clear the problem.  
The machine does not send.  
Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass.  
Check the fax machine you are sending to, to see if it can receive your fax.  
The incoming fax has blank  
spaces or is of poor-quality.  
The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty.  
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.  
Check your machine by making a copy.  
A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge (see "Replacing the toner cartridge"  
290  
6. Troubleshooting  
   
Faxing problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam.  
Some of the words on an  
incoming fax are stretched.  
There are lines on the originals Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (see "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 83).  
you sent.  
The machine dials a number,  
but the connection with the  
other fax machine fails.  
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak with the other machine operator and  
ask them to solve the problem on their side.  
Faxes do not store in memory. There may not be enough memory space to store the fax. If the display indicating the memory status shows, delete any faxes you no  
longer need from the memory, and then try to store the fax again. Call for service.  
Blank areas appear at the  
bottom of each page or on  
other pages, with a small strip  
of text at the top.  
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting. Check the paper size and type again.  
291  
6. Troubleshooting  
Operating system problems  
1
Common Windows problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
“File in Use” message appears Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.  
during installation.  
“General Protection Fault”,  
“Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or  
“Illegal Operation” messages  
appear.  
Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again.  
“Fail To Print”, “A printer  
timeout error occurred”  
message appear.  
These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready  
mode or after printing has completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred.  
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages.  
292  
6. Troubleshooting  
     
Operating system problems  
2
Common Macintosh problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not print PDF files  
correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or  
illustrations are missing.  
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options.  
It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image.  
Some letters are not displayed normally Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on  
during cover page printing. the cover page.  
When printing a document in Macintosh Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader.  
with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors  
print incorrectly.  
Refer to the Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages.  
293  
6. Troubleshooting  
 
Operating system problems  
3
Common Linux problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
The machine does not print.  
Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in the  
Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If  
not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device.  
Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine from the printers list. Look at the  
description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped, press the Start button. Normal operation of the machine  
should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occur.  
Check if your application has special print options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then  
remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the command line parameter in the  
command item.  
Some color images come out all This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color space of the document is indexed color  
black.  
space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should  
upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at  
www.ghostscript.com.  
Some color images come out in This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB  
unexpected color.  
color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you  
should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions  
at www.ghostscript.com.  
The machine does not print  
whole pages, and output is  
printed on half the page.  
It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been  
reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download  
the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem.  
294  
6. Troubleshooting  
 
Operating system problems  
Condition  
Suggested solutions  
I cannot scan via Gimp Front-  
end.  
Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane:Device dialog. on the Acquire menu. If not, you should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your  
computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page. For the detailed information,  
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end application.  
If you wish to use another kind of scan application, refer to application’s Help.  
“Cannot open port device file” Avoid changing print job parameters (e.q., via LPR GUI) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print  
error message appears when  
printing a document.  
job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port  
while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation  
occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in the Port configuration window.  
The machine does not appear  
on the scanners list.  
Ensure your machine is attached to your computer, connected properly via the USB port, and is turned on.  
Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system. Open Unified Linux Driver configurator, switch to Scanners  
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine's name is listed in the  
window.  
Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the  
situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of  
them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user will encounter “device busy” response. This usually  
happens when starting a scan procedure. An appropriate message box appears.  
To identify the source of the problem, open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner, port's symbol /  
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1 relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start  
at /dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you can  
see if the port is occupied by another application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or  
press the Release port button, if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly.  
The machine does not scan.  
Ensure a document is loaded into the machine, ensure your machine is connected to the computer.  
If there is an I/O error while scanning.  
295  
6. Troubleshooting  
Operating system problems  
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages.  
4
Common PostScript problems  
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used.  
Problem  
Possible cause  
Solution  
The PostScript file cannot be  
printed  
The PostScript driver may not be installed  
correctly.  
Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for  
printing.  
If the problem persists, contact a service representative.  
Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex.  
You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory.  
A PostScript error page prints  
The print job may not be PostScript.  
Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job. Check to see whether the software  
application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine.  
The optional tray is not  
selected in the driver  
The printer driver has not been configured to  
recognize the optional tray.  
Open the PostScript driver properties, select the Device Options tab, and set the  
tray option.  
When printing a document in  
The resolution setting in the printer driver may  
Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in  
Macintosh with Acrobat Reader not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader. Acrobat Reader.  
6.0 or higher, colors print  
incorrectly  
296  
6. Troubleshooting  
 
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact  
the Samsung customer care center.  
Country/Region  
Customer Care Center  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
400-810-5858  
Web Site  
CHILE  
Country/Region  
ALBANIA  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
CHINA  
42 27 5755  
COLOMBIA  
COSTA RICA  
CROATIA  
01-8000112112  
ARGENTINE  
ARMENIA  
0800-333-3733  
0-800-05-555  
1300 362 603  
0-800-507-7267  
062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864)  
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)  
AUSTRALIA  
CZECH REPUBLIC  
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, €  
0.07/min)  
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,  
Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8  
AUSTRIA  
AZERBAIJAN  
BAHRAIN  
088-55-55-555  
8000-4726  
DENMARK  
DOMINICA  
ECUADOR  
EGYPT  
70 70 19 70  
1-800-751-2676  
1-800-10-7267  
0800-726786  
0818 717100  
800-6225  
BELARUS  
810-800-500-55-500  
02-201-24-18  
www.samsung.com/be  
(Dutch)  
EIRE  
BELGIUM  
www.samsung.com/  
be_fr (French)  
EL SALVADOR  
ESTONIA  
FINLAND  
FRANCE  
800-7267  
BOSNIA  
BRAZIL  
05 133 1999  
030-6227 515  
01 48 63 00 00  
0800-124-421  
4004-0000  
BULGARIA  
CANADA  
07001 33 11  
01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 €  
0,14/min)  
GERMANY  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
297  
.
 
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
GEORGIA  
Customer Care Center  
8-800-555-555  
Web Site  
Country/Region  
JAMAICA  
Customer Care Center  
1-800-234-7267  
Web Site  
IT and Mobile : 80111-SAMSUNG www.samsung.com  
(80111 7267864) from land line,  
local charge/ from mobile, 210  
6897691  
JAPAN  
0120-327-527  
800-22273  
JORDAN  
KAZAKHSTAN  
KOSOVO  
8-10-800-500-55-500 (GSM:7799) www.samsung.com  
+381 0113216899  
GREECE  
Cameras, Camcorders,  
Televisions and Household  
Appliances  
KUWAIT  
183-2255  
From mobile and fixed  
2106293100  
KYRGYZSTAN  
LATVIA  
00-800-500-55-500  
8000-7267  
GUATEMALA  
HONDURAS  
1-800-299-0013  
800-27919267  
(852) 3698-4698  
www.samsung.com  
LITHUANIA  
LUXEMBURG  
MALAYSIA  
MACEDONIA  
MEXICO  
8-800-77777  
261 03 710  
1800-88-9999  
HONG KONG  
www.samsung.com/  
hk_en/  
023 207 777  
HUNGARY  
INDIA  
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
00-800-500-55-500  
020 405 888  
3030 8282  
MOLDOVA  
MONTENEGRO  
MOROCCO  
NIGERIA  
1800 3000 8282  
0800-112-8888  
021-5699-7777  
080 100 2255  
INDONESIA  
080-SAMSUNG(726-7864)  
IRAN  
021-8255  
0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) www.samsung.com  
(€ 0,10/min)  
NETHERLANDS  
ITALY  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
298  
.
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
NEW ZEALAND  
NICARAGUA  
NORWAY  
Customer Care Center  
Web Site  
Country/Region  
RUSSIA  
Customer Care Center  
8-800-555-55-55  
9200-21230  
Web Site  
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com  
00-1800-5077267  
815-56 480  
SAUDI ARABIA  
SERBIA  
0700 SAMSUNG (0700 726 7864) www.samsung.com  
OMAN  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
800-7267  
SINGAPORE  
SLOVAKIA  
SOUTH AFRICA  
SPAIN  
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678)  
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)  
PANAMA  
PERU  
0-800-777-08  
1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
02-5805777  
SWEDEN  
PHILIPPINES  
POLAND  
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF  
0.08/min)  
SWITZERLAND  
www.samsung.com/  
ch_fr/  
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678)  
022-607-93-33  
TADJIKISTAN  
TAIWAN  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0800-329-999  
PORTUGAL  
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
1-800-682-3180  
PUERTO RICO  
1800-29-3232  
02-689-3232  
THAILAND  
08010 SAMSUNG (08010 726  
7864) only from landline, local  
network Romtelecom - local tariff  
/
TRINIDAD &  
TOBAGO  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
RUMANIA  
TURKEY  
U.A.E  
444 77 11  
021 206 01 10 for landline and  
mobile, normal tariff.  
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
299  
.
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide  
Country/Region  
U.K  
Customer Care Center  
0330 SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)  
0-800-502-000  
Web Site  
U.S.A  
UKRAINE  
www.samsung.com/  
ua_ru  
UZBEKISTAN  
VENEZUELA  
VIETNAM  
8-10-800-500-55-500  
0-800-100-5303  
1 800 588 889  
300  
.
Glossary  
ADF  
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by  
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as  
mentioned in this user’s guide.  
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically  
feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the  
paper at once.  
802.11  
AppleTalk  
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)  
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE  
802).  
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for  
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is  
now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
802.11b/g/n  
BIT Depth  
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b  
supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150  
Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from  
microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices.  
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the  
color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader  
range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible  
colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly  
called as monochrome or black and white.  
Access point  
BMP  
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects  
wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks  
(WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals.  
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows  
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format  
on that platform.  
301  
.
 
Glossary  
BOOTP  
Coverage  
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP  
address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of  
computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign  
the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless  
workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced  
operating system.  
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For  
example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text  
on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the  
coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as  
the coverage.  
CSV  
CCD  
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange  
data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft  
Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among  
non-Microsoft platforms.  
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD  
Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage  
when you move the machine.  
Collation  
DADF  
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is  
selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies.  
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will  
automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine  
can scan on both sides of the paper.  
Control Panel  
Default  
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring  
instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.  
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state,  
reset, or initialized.  
302  
.
Glossary  
DHCP  
DPI  
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking  
protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP  
client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to  
participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of  
IP addresses to client hosts.  
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and  
printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail  
in the image, and a larger file size.  
DRPD  
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company  
service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several  
different telephone numbers.  
DIMM  
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory.  
DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data.  
Duplex  
DLNA  
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the  
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with  
a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle.  
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on  
a home network to share information with each other across the network.  
DNS  
Duty Cycle  
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated  
with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet.  
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a  
month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year.  
The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the  
warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month  
assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.  
Dot Matrix Printer  
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that  
runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked  
cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.  
303  
.
Glossary  
ECM  
EtherTalk  
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1  
fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the  
fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise.  
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It  
was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple  
in favor of TCP/IP networking.  
Emulation  
FDI  
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another.  
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a  
third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices  
allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.  
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so  
that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact  
reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which  
concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its  
internal state.  
FTP  
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files  
over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an  
intranet).  
Ethernet  
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area  
networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame  
formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the  
OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most  
widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.  
Fuser Unit  
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of  
a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the  
fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper  
permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer.  
304  
.
Glossary  
Gateway  
IEEE  
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network  
and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that  
allows access to another computer or network.  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international  
non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology  
related to electricity.  
Grayscale  
IEEE 1284  
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color  
images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of  
gray.  
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector  
type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example,  
a printer).  
Halftone  
Intranet  
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly  
colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a  
smaller number of dots.  
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and  
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an  
organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the  
term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website.  
Mass storage device (HDD)  
Mass storage device (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is  
a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly  
rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.  
IP address  
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to  
identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet  
Protocol standard.  
305  
.
Glossary  
IPM  
ITU-T  
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM  
rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within  
one minute.  
The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization  
established to standardize and regulate international radio and  
telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the  
radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between  
different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates  
telecommunication.  
IPP  
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as  
well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used  
locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access  
control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and  
secure printing solution than older ones.  
ITU-T No. 1 chart  
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile  
transmissions.  
IPX/SPX  
JBIG  
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a  
networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and  
SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol  
having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was  
primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol  
for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).  
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with  
no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary  
images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images.  
JPEG  
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard  
method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for  
storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web.  
ISO  
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international  
standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards  
bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards.  
306  
.
Glossary  
LDAP  
MH  
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for  
querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP.  
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of  
data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the  
image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length  
encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes  
consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most  
faxes.  
LED  
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status  
of a machine.  
MMR  
MAC address  
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-  
T T.6.  
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a  
network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12  
hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address  
is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer,  
and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.  
Modem  
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also  
demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information.  
MFP  
MR  
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following  
functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a  
scanner and etc.  
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR  
encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first,  
the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and  
transmitted.  
307  
.
Glossary  
NetWare  
OSI  
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used  
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network  
protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare  
supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.  
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International  
Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a  
standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of  
complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers  
are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network,  
Data Link and Physical.  
OPC  
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for  
print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or  
rust colored and has a cylinder shape.  
PABX  
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone  
switching system within a private enterprise.  
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage  
in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from  
contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper.  
PCL  
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL)  
developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard.  
Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying  
levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers.  
Originals  
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc,  
which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not  
itself copied or derived from something else.  
PDF  
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by  
Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device  
independent and resolution independent format.  
308  
.
Glossary  
PostScript  
Protocol  
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used  
primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an  
interpreter to generate an image.  
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,  
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.  
PS  
Printer Driver  
See PostScript.  
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the  
printer.  
PSTN  
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's  
public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is  
usually routed through the switchboard.  
Print Media  
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used  
in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.  
RADIUS  
PPM  
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote  
user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management  
of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA  
(authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network  
access.  
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast  
a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one  
minute.  
PRN file  
Resolution  
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device  
driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks.  
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi,  
the greater the resolution.  
309  
.
Glossary  
SMB  
TCP/IP  
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files,  
printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a  
network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication  
mechanism.  
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of  
communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the  
Internet and most commercial networks run.  
TCR  
SMTP  
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission  
such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can  
be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions.  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions  
across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one  
or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is  
transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email  
message to the server.  
TIFF  
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image  
format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF  
images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that  
is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be  
used for pictures that have been made by various image processing  
applications.  
SSID  
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All  
wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with  
each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32  
characters.  
Toner Cartridge  
Subnet Mask  
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains  
toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms  
the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by by a  
combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in  
the paper.  
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine  
which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host  
address.  
310  
.
Glossary  
TWAIN  
Watermark  
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant  
scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within  
the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple  
Macintosh operating systems.  
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter  
when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna,  
Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and  
also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to  
discourage counterfeiting.  
UNC Path  
WEP  
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares  
in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is:  
\\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>  
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to  
provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security  
by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one  
end point to another.  
URL  
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and  
resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to  
use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the  
resource is located.  
WIA  
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally  
introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within  
these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner.  
USB  
WPA  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB  
Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the  
parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB  
port to multiple peripherals.  
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi)  
computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of  
WEP.  
311  
.
Glossary  
WPA-PSK  
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or  
home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point  
(WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique  
key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more  
advanced security.  
WPS  
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home  
network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the  
wireless network connection easily without a computer.  
XPS  
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language  
(PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document  
and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based  
specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-  
independent document format.  
312  
.
copy  
emulation  
A
general setup  
general setup  
address book  
editing  
copy button  
emulation setup  
entering character  
error message  
copying  
general setup  
group editing  
group registering  
registering  
basic copying  
reducing or enlarging copies  
custom setup  
F
favorites settings, for printing  
fax  
using  
D
address book setup  
administrator’s setup  
AnyWeb Print  
authorized users  
registering  
default settings  
tray setting  
adding documents to a reserved fax 243  
automatic redialing  
direct printing utility  
document box  
general setup  
driver installation  
Unix  
canceling a reserved fax job  
changing the receive modes  
delaying a fax transmission  
forwarding a received fax to another  
destination  
C
cleaning  
forwarding a sent fax to another destination  
inside  
E
outside  
general setup  
eco printing  
email  
general setup  
email address  
searching  
pickup roller  
scan unit  
printing faxes on both sides of the paper  
Printing sent fax report automatically 251  
cleaning a machine  
control panel  
convention  
receiving a fax in the computer  
receiving faxes in memory  
storing  
receiving in Answering Machine mode 248  
313  
receiving in DRPD mode  
receiving in Fax mode  
printer properties  
printing  
general settings  
glossary  
receiving in secure mode  
receiving in Tel mode  
scanning  
I
system requirements  
unifled driver configurator  
using SetIP  
receiving with ext. telephone  
redialing the last number  
sending a fax in the computer  
sending a priority fax  
id copy  
ID copy button  
linux scanning  
loading  
J
sending faxes on both sides of paper 246  
paper in manual feeder/multi-purpose tray  
jam  
fax feature  
fax sending  
clearing original document  
clearing paper  
paper in the tray1  
special media  
multi sending  
tips for avoiding paper jams  
loading originals  
faxing  
L
adjusting darkness  
M
LCD display  
adjusting resolution  
preparing to fax  
machine information 179, 185, 186, 191, 196  
browsing the machine status 179, 185, 186,  
machine setup  
receiving in Fax mode  
Linux  
machine status  
features  
common Linux problems  
Macintosh  
machine features  
driver installation for network connected  
common Macintosh problems 293  
print media feature  
driver installation for network connected  
front view  
driver installation for USB cable connected  
G
driver installation for USB cable connected  
driver reinstallation for USB cable connected  
general icons  
driver reinstallation for USB cable connected  
314  
introducing network programs  
IPv6 configuration  
preparing originals type  
print  
general setup  
print media  
card stock  
printing  
scanning  
SetIP program  
wired network setup  
wireless network setup  
n-up printing  
system requirements  
using SetIP  
macintosh scanning  
maintenance parts  
manual feeder/multi-purpose tray  
loading  
envelope  
Macintosh  
labels  
output support  
preprinted paper  
setting the paper size  
setting the paper type  
special media  
transparency  
print menu  
O
on hook dial button  
optional memory  
memory/hard drive feature  
menu overview  
multi-purpose tray  
tips on using  
setting up the optional memory  
optional tray  
loading paper  
overlay printing  
create  
using special media  
print resolution set  
Linux  
N
delete  
printer preferences  
Linux  
network  
print  
driver installation  
Linux  
printer status  
general information  
Printing  
P
Macintosh  
placing a machine  
adjusting the altitude  
postScript driver  
troubleshooting  
UNIX  
Windows  
printing  
general setup  
installing environment  
changing the default print settings  
Linux  
315  
Macintosh  
printing problems  
Scanning with Samsung Scan Assitant 235  
multiple pages on one sheet of paper  
Macintosh  
printing quality problems  
scanning problems  
Scanning with SmarThru 4  
scanning  
printing a document  
Windows  
basic information  
Linux scanning  
R
printing on both sides of paper  
Macintosh  
rear view  
Macintosh scanning  
redial/pause button  
regulatiory information  
reports  
Scanning from image editing program 234  
printing to a file  
setting as a default machine  
special printer features  
UNIX  
Scanning from network connected machine  
Scanning to email  
Scanning to FTP/SMB server  
Scanning using the WIA driver  
Scanning with SmarThru Office  
service contact numbers  
SetIP program  
machine information 179, 186, 187, 188,  
191,  
resolution  
faxing  
using direct printing utility  
printing a document  
Linux  
S
Macintosh  
UNIX  
SmarThru 4  
safety  
printing feature  
information  
SmarThru Office  
Special features  
specifications  
problem  
operating system problems  
problems  
symbols  
Samsung Printer Status  
scan  
print media  
copying problems  
faxing problems  
paper feeding problems  
power problems  
general setup  
Scan Assitant  
scan feature  
Scanning  
status  
Storing  
supplies  
available supplies  
316  
monitoring the supplies life  
ordering  
system requirements  
Infrastructure mode  
installation  
USB cable  
usb  
replacing toner cartridge  
SyncThru Web Service  
general information  
general setupusb  
WPS  
USB cable  
disconnectiong  
PBC mode  
driver installation  
SyncThru™ Web Service  
driver reinstallation  
WPS (the machine does not have a display  
screen)  
using help  
T
PBC  
W
toner cartridge  
PIN  
redistributing toner  
replacing the cartridge  
tray  
watermark  
create  
wireless network  
network cable  
delete  
adjusting the width and length  
changing the tray size  
edit  
Windows  
loading paper in manual  
feeder/multi-purpose tray  
common Windows problems  
driver installation for network connected  
driver installation for USB cable connected  
setting the paper size and type  
U
28,  
system requirements  
using SetIP  
understanding the status LED  
UNIX  
wireless  
driver installation for network connected  
ad hoc mode  
computer  
printing  
Unix  
control panel  
317  

Unisar Ac401 2p User Manual
Toshiba Rav Sm800xt E User Manual
Savin 7700w User Manual
Panasonic 410048 User Manual
MAKITA HKU01 User Manual
MAKITA GD0600 02 User Manual
LG BE12LU30 User Manual
HP DESIGNJET 455CA User Manual
CRAFTSMAN 316.711700 User Manual
ACER ASPIRE 7535 User Manual